2009 Chevrolet HHR Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do this,”
or “Do not let this happen.”
Many times, this damage would not be covered by the
vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The notice
tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or Notice.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore
the warning.
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols
instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text
describing the operation or information relating to a
specific component, control, message, gage, or indicator.
{ CAUTION:
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Symbol Chart
. : Fuel Gage
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
+ : Fuses
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
j : LATCH System Child Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
F : Traction Control
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
# : Fog Lamps
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
Front Seats
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
Manual Seats
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seat Height Adjuster
Power Seat
Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control and Power
Lumbar shown
If your vehicle has this feature, the driver’s seat height
adjuster is located on the outboard side of the seat.
If the vehicle has a power seat, the control used to
operate it is located on the outboard side of the driver’s
seat. To adjust the seat, do any of the following:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.
To raise the seat, move the lever upward repeatedly
until the seat is at the desired height. To lower the seat,
move the lever downward repeatedly until the seat is
at the desired height.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
holding the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the entire seat by holding the rear of
the control up or down.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Lumbar
Heated Seats
If your vehicle has this
feature, the driver’s and
passenger’s heated
seat buttons are located
on the climate control
panel below the fan switch.
Driver’s side button
shown, Passenger’s
side button similar
If your vehicle has this feature, the control is located on
the outboard side of the driver’s seat cushion.
Press the button once to turn the heated seat to the high
setting. Both lights below the heated seat symbol will
come on. Press the button a second time and the heated
seat will go to the low setting. The bottom light will come
on to indicate that the setting is on low. Press the button
a third time to turn the heated seat off.
To increase support, press and hold the front of the
control. To decrease support, press and hold the rear of
the control. Keep in mind that as your seating position
changes, as it may during long trips, so should the
position of your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as
needed.
The heated seat feature will need to be turned on each
time the ignition is turned off and back on again.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reclining Seatbacks
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Passenger’s Side Reclining Lever shown, Driver’s
Side similar
{ CAUTION:
The seats have reclining seatbacks. The lever used to
operate them is located on the outboard side of the
seats. Lift the lever to release the seatback. Move the
seatback to where you want it and release the lever
to lock the seatback in place. Press rearward on
the seatback to be sure it is locked into place.
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in
motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up,
the safety belts cannot do their job when reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will
not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front
of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving
neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull the head restraint up
to raise it. To lower the
head restraint, press
Head Restraints
the button, located on
the top of the seatback,
and push the restraint
down. Only the front head
restraints are adjustable.
Both the front and rear head restraints can be removed.
Press the button, located on the top of the seatback, and
pull the restraint out from the seatback. Do not remove
the head restraint if someone will be sitting in that seat
while the vehicle is moving.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the
restraint is at the same height as the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck
injury in a crash.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Folding Seatback
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your vehicle has a front passenger seat that folds flat.
away from the area in which an airbag would
inflate. For more information, see Where Are the
on page 4-25.
{ CAUTION:
If you fold the seatback forward to carry longer
objects, such as skis, be sure any such cargo is
not near an airbag. In a crash, an inflating airbag
might force that object toward a person. This could
cause severe injury or even death. Secure objects
{ CAUTION:
CAUTION: (Continued)
Things you put on this seatback can strike and
injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a
crash. Remove or secure all items before driving.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To fold the seatback, do the following:
1. Move the front passenger seat rearward to ensure
there is enough room to fold the seatback forward.
The head restraint may need to be removed if
the seat is not able to be moved fully rearward.
If removing the head restraint, store it so that it
will not move while the vehicle is in motion.
2. Make sure that the seatback is in an upright position.
Use the recliner lever located on the outboard side of
the seat to move the seatback to the upright position.
3. To fold the seat flat, pull up on either lever located
toward the rear of the seatback. Fold the seat
forward until the seatback disengages.
4. Continue to fold the seat forward until it locks in the
folded position. Pull up on the seatback to be sure
it is locked.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To raise the seatback to an upright position:
1. Pull up on either lever.
Rear Seats
2. Push the seatback up until it is in a locked position.
Split Folding Rear Seat
The seatbacks can be folded flat.
To lower the rear seatback(s):
{ CAUTION:
1. Move the front seat forward and/or put the front
seatback in an upright position so it does not
interfere with folding the rear seatback forward.
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
2. Open the rear door while the vehicle is parked.
3. The rear head restraint may need to be removed if
it interferes with the front seat when the front seat
is moved back in place. If removed, store the
head restraint where it cannot move while the
vehicle is in motion.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull up on the knob
located on the top of
the seatback on
the outboard side to
release the seatback.
4. Move the safety belt out of the way before lowering
the seatback. Do not let the safety belt get caught
between the seatback and seat cushion as the
seatback is folded.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
seatback, always check to be sure that the
safety belts are properly routed and attached, and
are not twisted.
6. Lift the seatback up and push rearward until you
hear a click. Keep the safety belt clear of the seat
and not twisted.
The release knob on the top of the seatback has a
red ring. If the seatback is not fully latched this
ring will be visible. Push on the seatback until the
ring is not visible.
To raise the rear seatback(s):
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move forward
in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury
to the person sitting there. Always pull forward on
the top of the seatback at the area of the latch to be
sure it is locked.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly
attached, or twisted will not provide the protection
needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. After raising the rear
CAUTION: (Continued)
7. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked in place.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{ CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is
in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
This section of the manual describes how to use
safety belts properly. It also describes some things not
to do with safety belts.
{ CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
additional information.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without safety belts, they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in
a crash — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a
good driver does not protect you from things
beyond your control, such as bad drivers.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules for
smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the
everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor
in front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and
you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you
slid under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The
belt force would then be applied on the abdomen,
not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes
under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also,
the belt would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal organs like your
liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature
may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt
go back all the way and start again.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Engaging the child restraint locking feature may
affect the passenger sensing system. See Passenger
page 1-72.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section for use and important safety information.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should return to its stowed position.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of
the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger seating positions.
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for
front outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safety
belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety belts
during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal
or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for
pretensioner activation are met. And, if the vehicle has
side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can help
tighten the safety belts in a side crash and rear events.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away
from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Push down on the release
button (A) and move
the height adjuster to
the desired position.
The adjuster can be moved
up by pushing the release
button up on the shoulder
belt guide.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, They will need to be replaced,
and probably other new parts for the vehicle’s safety
belt system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash on page 1-80
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the shoulder
belt away from the neck and head.
After the height adjuster is set to the desired position,
try to move it down without pressing the release
button to make sure it has locked into position.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is one guide for each outboard passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the belt
edges together so that the safety belt can be removed
from the guide. Pull the guide upward to expose its
storage clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn
the guide and clip inward and slide them in between the
seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop of
the elastic cord exposed.
{ CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother.
When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that
the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women,
as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is
wearing them properly.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/retailer
will order you an extender. When you go in to order it,
take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will
be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do
not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it
is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it
to the regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:
Child Restraints
Older Children
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using
the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear Safety
page 1-26 for more information. If the shoulder belt
still does not rest on the shoulder, then return to the
booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the length
of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the
booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
• If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional
restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
{ CAUTION:
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,
just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt
force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system
or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating
position.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them. Every
time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they
should have the protection provided by appropriate
child restraints.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child will
become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during
a crash. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s arms.
An infant should be secured in an appropriate
restraint.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{ CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant’s neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{ CAUTION:
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Secure the child properly following
the instructions that came with that child restraint.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
CAUTION: (Continued)
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the
right front passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward position.
We recommend that children and child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag
deploys.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
{ CAUTION:
information.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing
child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle,
even if the airbag is off.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must never be attached
using only the top tether and anchor.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle.
The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order
to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for your child restraint.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower
anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Front Passenger
Seat — Panel and Rear
Seat Delete Models
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower
anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
Rear Seat
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the seat
cushion.
To assist you in locating the
top tether anchors, this
symbol will be located on
the lower side quarter
panels for the rear outboard
positions, on the storage
compartment for the rear
center position and on the
cargo mat behind the rear
seats.
Vehicles with Rear Seats
The rear outboard top tether anchors are located on the
cargo floor behind the rear seats.
The rear center top tether anchor is located in a storage
compartment behind the rear seats. Lift the lid of the
storage compartment to access the anchor. You may
have to fold back the cargo mat to access the storage
compartment and the top tether anchor for the rear center
seating position.
Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of
the vehicle as the seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
additional information.
Vehicles without Rear Seats — Panel and Rear Seat
Delete Models
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat, there will be
an exposed top tether anchor for the front passenger
position located on the rear passenger side pillar behind
the front passenger seat.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{ CAUTION:
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor
or attachment to come loose or even break during
a crash. A child or others could be injured. To
reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{ CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Install a
LATCH-type child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure
the restraint, following the instructions that came
with the child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
{ CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if
your vehicle has one, after the child restraint has
been installed.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety
belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position, before folding the seat.
2.1. To secure a child restraint in the rear
center seating position, find the storage
compartment behind the rear seats. You may
have to fold back the cargo mat to access the
storage compartment and the top tether
anchor.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
Lift the lid of the storage compartment to
access the top tether anchor for the rear
center seating position.
2.2. To secure a child restraint in the rear
outboard seating positions, find the top
tether anchor located on the cargo floor
behind the rear seats.
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
Be sure to use an anchor located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating
position where the child restraint will
be placed.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3. To secure a child in the front passenger
position, only if your vehicle does not have
rear seats, find the top tether anchor located
on the rear passenger side pillar behind
the front passenger seat.
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
Be sure to use an anchor located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating
position where the child restraint will be
placed.
2.4. If the position you are using has an
adjustable headrest or head restraint, raise it.
2.5. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
raise the headrest or head
restraint and route the
tether under the headrest
or head restraint and in
between the headrest or
head restraint posts.
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether around the
headrest or head restraint.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position,
study the instructions that came with the child restraint to
make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-43
for how and where to install the child restraint using
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using
a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
tether anchor locations.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in
the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing
child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
{ CAUTION:
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger
information, including important safety information.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top
strap must be anchored.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
information.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle.
page 3-31.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
page 1-43 for how and where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
top tether anchor locations.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat and your
child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
more information.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint” under Passenger Sensing System (Without
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing
child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety
belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top
tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Even if you do not have a right front passenger seat in
your vehicle there is still an active frontal airbag in
the right side of the instrument panel. Do not place cargo
in front of this airbag.
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
The vehicle may have the following airbags:
{ CAUTION:
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
Be sure that cargo is not near an airbag. In a
crash, an inflating airbag might force that object
toward a person. This could cause severe injury
or even death. Secure objects away from the
area in which an airbag would inflate. For more
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind that
passenger.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags are
also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the
force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate very
quickly to do their job.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even
with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbags
are not designed to deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only restraint.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag
for that person.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with
roof-rail airbags.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
{ CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can provide.
Always secure children properly in your vehicle.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag
covering.
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do,
the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right
front passenger, and second row outboard passengers,
they are in the ceiling above the side windows.
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or right
front passenger’s head and chest. However, they are only
designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined
deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used
to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has an electronic frontal
sensor, which helps the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
Your vehicle may or may not have roof-rail airbags.
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.
In addition, these roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate
during a rollover. Roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash
severity is above the system’s designed threshold level.
The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object does not deform.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal
impacts, near-frontal impacts, or rear impacts. A roof-rail
airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle
that is struck or if the sensing system predicts that
the vehicle is about to roll over.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags,
deployment is determined by the location and severity of
the side impact. In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag
deployment is determined by the direction of the roll.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags distribute
the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s
upper body.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help
contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard
seating positions in the first and second rows. The
rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help
reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events,
although no system can prevent all such ejections.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator, the
airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag
module.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not toward
page 1-63 for more information.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with roof-rail
airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the
vehicle, near the side windows that have occupant
seating positions.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
{ CAUTION:
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate,
so quickly that some people may not even realize an
airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after they deploy.
Some components of the airbag module may be hot
for several minutes. For location of the airbag modules,
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but cannot get
out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical attention.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving
the vehicle.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the
hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and
turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional
windshield breakage may also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing System (Without
Turbo/With Turbo and RPO AS5)
This information is for vehicles without a turbo engine
or a vehicle equipped with a turbo engine and Regular
Production Option (RPO) code AS5. RPO codes
are listed on the Service Parts Identification label.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the
airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include airbag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for the
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for
the right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible on the instrument panel
when the vehicle is started.
• The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an airbag
system will not work properly. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are
using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance,
if equipped, you may not see the system check. When
the system check is complete, either the word ON or the
word OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbag and roof-rail airbags (if equipped)
are not affected by the passenger sensing system.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger
frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag is turned off.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing
child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle,
even if the airbag is off.
For some children, including children in child restraints,
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger frontal
airbag, depending upon the person’s seating posture
and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a child restraint.
{ CAUTION:
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
for more information, including important safety
information.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
The passenger sensing system is designed turn on (may
inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag anytime
the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting
properly in the right front passenger seat. When the
passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be
enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind
you that the airbag is active.
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle
off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and
adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure
that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child
restraint into the seat cushion.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 1-7.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
6. Restart the vehicle.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
The passenger sensing system may or may not turn
off the airbag for a child in a child restraint depending
upon the child’s seating posture and body build. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
If no rear seat is available, do not install a child
restraint in this vehicle.
1-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag:
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
1-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Liquid pooled on the seat that has not soaked in
may make it more likely that the passenger sensing
system will enable (turn on) the passenger airbag
while a child restraint or child occupant is on the seat.
If the passenger airbag is turned on, the on indicator
will be lit.
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in
the Index for additional information about the importance
of proper restraint use.
If the passenger seat gets wet, dry the seat immediately.
If the airbag readiness light is lit, do not install a child
restraint or allow anyone to occupy the seat. See Airbag
information.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,
seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system operates. We recommend
that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket
equipment except when approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
The on indicator may be lit if an object, such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device, is put on an unoccupied seat. If this
is not desired, remove the object from the seat.
modifications that can affect how the system operates.
{ CAUTION:
A wet seat can affect the performance of the passenger
sensing system. Here is how:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
may interfere with the proper operation of the
passenger sensing system.
• The passenger sensing system may turn off the
passenger airbag when liquid is soaked into the seat.
If this happens, the off indicator will be lit, and the
airbag readiness light on the instrument panel will
also be lit.
1-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
if equipped, you may not see the system check. When
the system check is complete, either the word ON or the
word OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible.
Passenger Sensing System
(With Turbo and RPO AR9 or AE4)
This information is for vehicles with a turbo engine and
Regular Production Option (RPO) code AR9 or AE4.
RPO codes are listed on the Service Parts Identification
page 5-107.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. The
driver airbag and roof-rail airbags (if equipped) are
not affected by the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger
frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible on the instrument
panel when the vehicle is started.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are
using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance,
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
1-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing
child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle,
even if the airbag is off.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag is turned off.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
1-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
for more information, including important safety
information.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
on (may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger frontal
airbag, depending upon the person’s seating posture
and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
1-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle
off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and
adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure
that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child
restraint into the seat cushion.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 1-7.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
6. Restart the vehicle.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child restraint
in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and check
with your dealer/retailer.
1-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag:
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
1-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in
the Index for additional information about the importance
of proper restraint use.
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced. There
are parts of the airbag system in several places around
the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about servicing the vehicle and the
airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,
seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system operates. We recommend
that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket
equipment except when approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
{ CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
modifications that can affect how the system operates.
{ CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
may interfere with the proper operation of the
passenger sensing system.
1-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system may not operate
properly if the original seat trim is replaced with
non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GM
covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different
vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat
heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could
also interfere with the operation of the passenger
sensing system. This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent
the passenger sensing system from properly turning
off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change the vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, front sensors, side impact
sensors, rollover sensor module, or airbag wiring
can affect the operation of the airbag system.
If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger seat.
If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags,
for additional important information.
1-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
information.
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Airbags
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-30 for more information.
Restraint System Check
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not
open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag
covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
for service.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn or
1-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
{ CAUTION:
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was
not being used at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle
has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started, or while you are driving.
1-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and the driver’s
door lock.
The key has a transponder in the key head that
matches a decoder in the vehicle’s steering column.
If a replacement key or any additional keys are needed,
you must purchase it from your dealer/retailer.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys.
Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range, try this:
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far
from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or snowy
weather.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside
page 7-7 for more information.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
• If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for
service.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
work up to 60 feet (18 m) away from the vehicle.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pressing Q may arm the content theft-deterrent system.
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock the driver door.
If enabled through the DIC, the horn chirps to indicate
unlocking has occurred. See “UNLOCK HORN” under
information. If K is pressed again within five seconds,
all remaining doors and the liftgate unlock. The interior
lamps come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the
ignition is turned on. If enabled through the DIC, the
parking lamps flash twice to indicate unlocking has
occurred and the high beams and parking lamps may turn
on and stay on for 20 seconds or until a door is opened.
See LIGHT FLASH and EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS under
information.
With Remote Start and
Remote Rear Doors
Shown, Without Similar
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this
feature, press to start the engine from outside the
vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
to activate the vehicle locate feature. The horn chirps
three times and the headlamps and parking lamps flash
three times.
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors. The interior lamps
turn off after all of the doors are closed. If enabled
through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the parking
lamps flash once to indicate locking has occurred.
If enabled through the DIC, the horn chirps to indicate
locking has occurred. See “LOCK HORN” under
information.
Press and hold L for three seconds to sound the panic
alarm. The horn chirps and the headlamps and parking
lamps flash for 30 seconds. Press L again to cancel the
panic alarm.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Rear Door Operation (Panel)
* : Press and hold for about one second to open
the rear driver side door.
+ : Press and hold for about one second to open
the rear passenger side door.
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle
will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be purchased and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen transmitters
no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed.
Each vehicle can have up to four transmitters
programmed to it.
To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted into the notch on the side.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
Battery Replacement
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
Replace the battery if the KEY FOB BATT LOW
message displays in the DIC. See “KEY FOB BATT
for additional information.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the transmitter.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): This button will be on the
Remote Vehicle Start
RKE transmitter if you have remote start.
Your vehicle may have a remote start feature.
This feature allows you to start the engine from
outside the vehicle. It may also start the vehicle’s
heating or air conditioning systems. See Climate
To start the engine using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button,
then immediately press and hold the remote
vehicle start button for four seconds or until the
vehicle’s turn signal lamps flash. The vehicle’s
doors will be locked.
Laws in some local communities may restrict the use
of remote starters. For example, some laws may require
a person using remote start to have the vehicle in
view when doing so. Check local regulations for
any requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
When the vehicle’s engine starts, the parking lamps
will turn on and remain on while the engine is
running.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has
been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine
is still running, to extend the engine running time by
10 minutes. Remote start can be extended one time.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range
of operation. However, the range may be less while
the vehicle is running.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
information.
After a remote start, the engine will automatically shut off
after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done
or the vehicle’s key is inserted into the ignition switch and
turned to ON/RUN.
The maximum number of remote starts between ignition
cycles with the key is two.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the remote start procedure is used again before the
first 10 minute time frame has ended, the first 10 minutes
will immediately expire and the second 10 minute time
frame will start.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if:
• The remote start system is disabled through
the DIC.
• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.
• The vehicle’s hood is open
After your vehicle’s engine has been started two times
using the remote start button, the vehicle’s ignition
switch must be turned to ON/RUN and then back to
LOCK/OFF using the key before the remote start
procedure can be used again.
• The hazard warning flashers are on.
• There is an emission control system malfunction.
To manually shut off the engine after a remote start:
• The engine coolant temperature is too high.
• The oil pressure is low.
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and
press the remote start button until the parking lamps
turn off.
• Two remote vehicle starts have already been
provided.
• Insert the vehicle’s key into the ignition switch and
turn the switch to ON/RUN and then back to
LOCK/OFF.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Doors and Locks
To lock the driver’s door from the outside, turn the
key clockwise. To unlock the door, turn the key
counterclockwise.
Door Locks
You can also use the remote keyless entry transmitter
to lock and unlock the doors.
{ CAUTION:
From the inside, use the manual lock knobs on each door
or the power door lock switch to lock and unlock all doors.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle.
When a door is locked, the handle will not
open it. The chance of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are
not locked. So, all passengers should wear
safety belts properly and the doors should be
locked whenever the vehicle is driven.
• Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever
leaving it.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock
switches are located on
the driver’s and front
passenger’s door next
to the door handle.
Driver’s side shown,
Passenger’s side similar
• Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.
Locking your doors can help prevent this from
happening.
Press the top of the switch to unlock the doors.
Press the bottom of the switch to lock the doors.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Delayed Locking
Automatic Door Lock
This feature will delay the actual locking of the doors
and liftgate when the power door lock switch or remote
keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle.
On vehicles with power door locks, the doors
automatically lock when the shift lever is moved out
of (P) Park for a vehicle with an automatic transmission.
For a vehicle with a manual transmission, the speed must
be greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
If any door is open when locking the vehicle, three
chimes will sound signaling that the delayed locking
feature is active. Five seconds after the last door is
closed, all of the doors and liftgate will lock. The turn
signal lamps will flash to indicate that the doors have
been locked. To cancel the delay and lock the doors
immediately, press the lock button a second time.
The automatic door locking feature cannot be disabled.
Programmable Automatic Door
Unlock
If the key is in the ignition this feature will not lock the
doors.
Your vehicle will automatically unlock all doors when the
shift lever is moved into (P) Park for a vehicle with an
automatic transmission, and when the ignition is
turned off for a vehicle with a manual transmission.
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),
you can disable this function. See DIC Vehicle
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),
the doors can be programmed to automatically unlock
several ways for vehicles with an automatic transmission.
information.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open a rear door while the security lock is on, do the
following:
Rear Door Security Locks
Vehicles with rear door security locks prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, the power door lock switch, or by
lifting the rear door manual lock.
On vehicles with this
feature, the rear door
security locks are located
on the inside edge of
each rear door. You must
open the rear doors to
access them.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the lock below the rear door
security lock label and turn it to the vertical
position.
3. Repeat the steps for the other lock.
To set the security locks, do the following:
1. Insert the key into the lock below the rear door
security lock label and turn it to the horizontal
position.
2. Close the door.
3. Repeat the steps for the other rear door.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lockout Protection
Liftgate
If you press the power door lock switch when the key is
in the ignition and any door is open, all the doors will
lock and the driver’s door will unlock. Be sure to remove
the key from the ignition when locking your vehicle.
To lock the liftgate from the outside, press the lock
button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
To unlock the liftgate with the RKE, press the unlock
button twice within five seconds. For more information,
on page 2-4. You can also use the power door
lock switch to lock and unlock the liftgate.
The lockout protection can be overridden by pressing
and holding the power door lock in the lock position for
three seconds.
Open the liftgate by pressing the touchpad located in the
handle above the license plate. Once slightly opened, the
liftgate will rise by itself. Lamps in the rear of the vehicle
will come on, illuminating the rear cargo area, unless
the dome lamp lever is in the off position. For more
Rear Side Cargo Door
(HHR Panel Only)
The rear side cargo doors can be opened by pressing
the buttons located on the driver and passenger sides of
the instrument panel, or by using the Remote Keyless
Access (RKE) transmitter. See Instrument Panel
Notice: If you open the liftgate without checking for
overhead obstructions such as a garage door, you
could damage the liftgate or the liftgate glass. Always
check to make sure the area above and behind the
liftgate is clear before opening it.
To use the buttons on the instrument panel, the driver
side door must be unlocked.
Push the door to close.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{ CAUTION:
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
• If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any
objects that pass through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, or
trunk/hatch open:
• Close all of the windows.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Locate the release
lever on the latch.
Manual Liftgate Release
To manually open the liftgate, do the following:
The lever is located about three inches (7.62 cm)
behind the trim in the access hole.
1. Remove the trim plug, located on the inside of the
liftgate near the center.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Push the release lever
rearward.
4. The liftgate will unlatch when the lever is pushed
rearward. Push the liftgate to open.
3. Insert a tool into the access hole.
5. Reinstall the trim plug.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
Driver’s Side Shown
The power window controls are located on each of the
side doors. The driver’s door also has switches that
control the passenger and rear windows.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
Press the switch to lower the window. Pull up on the
front edge of the switch to raise the window.
The power windows work when the ignition has been
turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down Window
Sun Visors
The driver’s window switch has an express-down feature
that allows the window to be lowered without holding
the switch. Press the switch part way, and the driver’s
window will open a small amount. Press the switch down
all the way, release it, and the window will go down
automatically.
To block out glare, swing down the visor(s). The sun
visors can also be detached from the center mount and
swung out to cover the side windows. They can also be
slid along the rod to cover different areas of the front
window.
Visor Vanity Mirrors
To stop the window while it is lowering, press and
release the top of, or pull up on the switch.
Your vehicle has visor vanity mirrors. Swing down the
sun visor and lift the cover to expose the mirror.
Window Lockout
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,
they do not make it impossible to steal.
o (Window Lockout): Your vehicle has a lockout
feature to prevent rear seat passengers from operating
the windows. Press the lockout button, located with
the power window switches, to turn the feature on and
off. When the red band on the button is showing,
the lockout feature is off.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter a second
time, while all the doors are closed, to immediately arm
the system. The system still arms in 60 seconds if a door
is open. When the open door is closed, it also arms.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have a
content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
The security light turns on to indicate that arming has
been initiated. Once the system is armed, the security
light flashes once every three seconds.
If the security light flashes twice per second, a door
is open.
Locking the vehicle with the manual lock knobs on the
doors will not arm the system.
Arming the System
Disarming the System
To arm the system:
1. Turn the ignition off.
Disarm the system by doing any one of the following:
• Press the RKE transmitter unlock button.
• Turn the ignition on.
2. Press lock on the RKE transmitter.
The system will arm after either of the following occur:
• 30 seconds after all the doors are closed.
• 60 seconds with any door open.
Once the system is disarmed, the security light stops
flashing.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
How the System Alarm is Activated
If the system is armed, it can be activated by either:
• Opening the driver’s door or tailgate. This causes a
10 second pre-alarm chirp followed by a 30 second
full alarm of horn and lights.
The PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
• Opening any other door. This immediately causes a
full alarm of horn and lights for 30 seconds.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
When an alarm event has finished, the system re-arms
itself automatically.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
To turn off the system alarm, do one of the following:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
The system will then re-arm itself.
1. This device may not cause interference.
• Press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
This will also disarm the system.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on. This will
also disarm the system.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
The content theft security system alarm was previously
activated if three chirps sound when you press the
lock or unlock buttons on the RKE transmitter.
PASS-Key III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in the vehicle.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, you
may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your
vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your
dealer/retailer who can service the PASS-Key® III+ to
have a new key made. In an emergency, contact
Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 7-7, for more information.
It may be possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to
“learn” the transponder value of a new or replacement
key. Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are
lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer
or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to
have keys made and programmed to the system.
The system is automatically armed when the key is
removed from the ignition.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not
start and the security light comes on, there may be a
problem with your theft-deterrent system. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the new key:
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the already programmed key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start,
see your dealer/retailer for service.
New Vehicle Break-In
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to the
ON/RUN position within five seconds of the original
key being turned to the LOCK/OFF position.
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
If you are ever driving and the security light comes on
and stays on, you may be able to restart your engine if
you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,
is not working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer/retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
PASS-Key® III+ system at this time.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,
see your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can
service PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
Trailer (Automatic Transmission) on page 4-34
page 4-41 for the trailer towing capabilities of
your vehicle and more information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the shift
lever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch to
LOCK/OFF.
Ignition Positions
On vehicles with a manual transmission, the ignition
switch can be turned to LOCK/OFF in any shift lever
position.
The steering can bind with the wheel turned off center.
If this happens, move it from right to left while turning the
key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this does not work, then the
vehicle needs service.
{ CAUTION:
If you have a manual transmission removing the
key from the ignition switch will lock the steering
column and result in a loss of ability to steer the
vehicle. This could cause a collision. If you need
to turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving,
turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.
The ignition switch has four different positions.
In order to shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedal
must be applied.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or break
the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the
way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key
cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer.
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position operates
some of the electrical accessories. It unlocks the
steering wheel and ignition.
9 (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the steering column
when the key is removed. The key can only be removed
in LOCK/OFF.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R (ON/RUN): This is the position in which you can
operate the electrical accessories and to display some
instrument panel cluster warning and indicator lights. The
switch stays in this position when the engine is running.
Column Lock Release
For vehicles with an automatic transmission, the
following procedure allows the ignition to be turned to
LOCK/OFF and ignition key to be removed in case of a
dead battery or low voltage battery.
If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/
RUN position with the engine off, the battery could be
drained. You may not be able to start the vehicle if the
battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in P (Park).
/ (START): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will
return to ON/RUN for driving.
A warning tone will sound when the driver door is opened,
the ignition is in LOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY and
the key is in the ignition.
2. Remove the cover from the bottom of the steering
column.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories may be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off.
• Audio System
• Power Windows
• Sunroof, if equipped
The power windows and sunroof will continue to work
for up to 10 minutes or until any door is opened. The
radio will work when the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from ON/RUN to
OFF/LOCK, the radio will continue to work for 10 minutes
or until the driver door is opened.
3. Locate the plunger.
Starting the Engine
4. Press and hold the plunger while turning the ignition
key to LOCK/OFF. Remove the key.
Place the transmission in the proper gear.
Have the vehicle serviced at your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible.
Automatic Transmission
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). The
engine will not start in any other position. To restart the
vehicle when it is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicle
is stopped.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
Manual Transmission
The shift lever should be in N (Neutral) and the parking
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal down to the floor
and start the engine. The vehicle will not start if the clutch
pedal is not all the way down.
Starting Procedure
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding
it there as you hold the key in START for a maximum
of 15 seconds. Wait at least 15 seconds between
each try, to allow the cranking motor to cool. When
the engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator.
If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,
repeat the procedure. This clears the extra gasoline
from the engine. Do not race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission
gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all
moving parts.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go
of the key. The idle speed will go down as the engine
warms. Do not race the engine immediately after
starting it. Operate the engine and transmission
gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all
moving parts.
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned
to the START position, and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.
If the engine does not start and the key is held in
START for many seconds, cranking will be stopped
after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage.
To prevent gear damage, this system also prevents
cranking if the engine is already running. Engine
cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition
switch to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the engine
operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check
with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Heater
{ CAUTION:
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold
weather condition at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles
with am engine coolant heater should be plugged in at
least four hours before starting. An internal thermostat
in the plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
above 0°F (−18°C).
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a
properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The electrical cord is located on the passenger
side of the vehicle near the headlamp and
the radiator.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts, to prevent damage.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in
the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the
best advice on this.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
{ CAUTION:
If the vehicle has an automatic transmission, the shift
lever is located on the console between the seats.
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
There are several different
positions for the automatic
transmission.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is the
best position to use when starting the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You have
to fully apply the regular brakes first and then press
the shift lever button before the vehicle can shift
from P (Park) when the ignition key is in ON/RUN.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure
on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into
P (Park) as you maintain brake application. Then press
the shift lever button and then move the shift lever into
another gear. See Shifting Out of Park (Automatic
{ CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is
not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission, see
page 4-24.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving with the
automatic transmission. It provides the best fuel
economy. If you need more power for passing and
you are:
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when
the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Also, use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the accelerator
all the way down.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. The repair will not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
I (Intermediate): This position is also used for normal
driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed without
using the brakes for slight downgrades where the vehicle
would otherwise accelerate due to steepness of grade.
If constant upshifting or downshifting occurs while
driving up steep hills, this position can be used to
prevent repetitive types of shifts. You might choose
I (Intermediate) instead of D (Drive) when driving on hilly,
winding roads and when towing a trailer, so that there is
less shifting between gears.
Manual Transmission Operation
PERFORMANCE SHIFTING: If the vehicle has this
feature, it can detect a change in driving patterns
while in the Intermediate position. If you make an
aggressive driving maneuver, the vehicle’s transmission
automatically shifts to the lowest possible gear to
maximize vehicle performance. The vehicle will
automatically return to normal operation when you
return to normal driving patterns.
This is the shift pattern for standard models.
L (Low): This position reduces vehicle speed more than
I (Intermediate) without actually using the brakes. You
can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If
the shift lever is put in L (Low), the transmission will not
shift into L (Low) until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the
accelerator pedal and shift into 2 (Second). Then, slowly
let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator
pedal.
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth): Shift into 3 (Third),
4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth) the same way you do for
2 (Second). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you
press the accelerator pedal down.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the
clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to N (Neutral).
This is the shift pattern for SS models.
N (Neutral): Use this position when you start or idle the
engine.
Here is how to operate the manual transmission:
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal and shift into 1 (First).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press
the accelerator pedal.
R (Reverse): To back up, press down the clutch pedal
and shift into R (Reverse).
For SS models, lift upwards on the ring located on the
underside of the shift knob to shift into R (Reverse).
You can shift into 1 (First) when the vehicle is traveling
less than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to a
complete stop and it is hard to shift into 1 (First), put the
shift lever in N (Neutral) and let up on the clutch pedal.
Press the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into
1 (First).
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle is stopped.
Also, use R (Reverse), along with the parking brake, for
parking the vehicle.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shift Speeds
No-Lift Upshift (SS Models)
If the vehicle has the 2.0L turbo engine and manual
transmission, it has the capability of No-Lift Upshifts.
This feature maximizes vehicle acceleration by allowing
you to shift the transmission to a higher gear without
taking your foot off the accelerator. No-Lift Upshifting is
enabled in all Electronic Stability Control modes. See
information. Use this feature only when the engine has
reached normal operating temperature. Correct shifting
allows the engine to maintain boost pressure during
shifts, while also keeping the engine from over-revving.
{ CAUTION:
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you could
lose control of the vehicle. You could injure
yourself or others. Do not shift down more than
one gear at a time when you downshift.
Up-Shift Light
To utilize this feature:
If the vehicle has a manual
transmission, there may be
an up-shift light. This light
will show you when to shift
to the next higher gear for
the best fuel economy.
1. Accelerate the vehicle by fully depressing the
accelerator pedal.
2. Just prior to reaching the maximum engine speed,
quickly complete the upshift utilizing the clutch while
keeping the accelerator pedal fully applied. A quicker
shift maneuver gives the best performance. If the
engine is operated at the maximum engine speed for
greater than one second, the engine exits the No-Lift
Upshift mode and resumes normal engine overspeed
protection.
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road, and traffic conditions let
you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly
and shift when the light comes on.
While accelerating, it is normal for the light to go on and
off if you quickly change the position of the accelerator.
Ignore the light when downshifting.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Brake
CAUTION: (Continued)
pulled up far enough, the vehicle may roll and you
or others could be injured. Move your hand lower
on the lever or raise the seat back so that you can
set the brake.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition
is on, the brake system warning light will come on.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down.
Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press the
release button. Hold the release button in as you move
the brake lever all the way down.
The parking brake lever is located between the front
seats.
If you forget to release your parking brake, a chime
will sound and a warning message will be displayed
when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle
is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h). See DIC Warnings
{ CAUTION:
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If the front passenger seat back is folded down,
the armrest may make it awkward to grab and pull
up the parking brake lever. If the lever is not
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission)
Shifting Into Park (Automatic
Transmission)
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat
and even catch fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine
running.
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer (Automatic
If you have to leave an automatic transmission vehicle
with the engine running, be sure the vehicle is in
P (Park) and the parking brake is firmly set before you
leave it. After you have moved the shift lever into
P (Park), hold the brake pedal down. Then, see if you
can move the shift lever away from P (Park) without first
pushing the button. If you can, it means that the shift
lever was not fully locked into P (Park).
To shift into P (Park):
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking
information.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by holding in the
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
Shifting Out of Park
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift into
P (Park) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too
much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. You
may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torque lock, set
the parking brake and then shift into P (Park) properly
before you leave the driver seat. To find out how, see
page 2-34.
(Automatic Transmission)
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever
is in P (Park) with the shift lever button fully
released, and
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of
P (Park) unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is applied.
Move the shift lever out of P (Park) before you release
the parking brake.
The shift lock release is always functional except in
the case of a an uncharged or low voltage (less than
9 volt) battery.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.
Parking the Vehicle
(Manual Transmission)
To shift out of P (Park):
Before leaving the vehicle, fully press the clutch pedal
down, move the shift lever into R (Reverse), and firmly
apply the parking brake. Once the shift lever has been
placed in R (Reverse) with the clutch pedal pressed
down, the ignition key can be turned to LOCK/OFF, then
remove the key and release the clutch pedal. See Manual
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Then press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever button again.
Parking Over Things That Burn
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
{ CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION: (Continued)
• The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
• There are holes or openings in the vehicle
body from damage or after-market
{ CAUTION:
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
modifications that are not completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
• Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
• Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
• The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
that has no fresh air ventilation.
• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
{ CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle
if the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.
The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle
when the engine is running unless you have to.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set the
parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park).
{ CAUTION:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has
no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
on page 2-34.
If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Towing a
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle may also have a Rear Vision Camera.
information.
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it for
a clearer view behind your vehicle. Adjust the mirror to
avoid glare from the headlamps behind you. Push the tab
forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use.
Automatic dimming reduces the glare of lights from
behind the vehicle. The dimming feature comes on and
the indicator light illuminates each time the vehicle is
started.
If the vehicle has map lamps, press the buttons located
at the bottom of the mirror to turn them on or off.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror.
Use a soft towel dampened with water.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside
rearview mirror with a compass and map lights and/or
OnStar®.
Compass
Compass Operation
Vehicles with OnStar have three additional control
buttons located at the bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer/retailer for more information on the system
on page 2-47 for more information about the services
OnStar provides.
Y / O (On/Off): If the vehicle has one of these
buttons, press to turn the compass on or off.
With the compass feature on, each time the vehicle is
started, the compass displays the current compass
direction after a few seconds.
Press the buttons located at the bottom of the mirror to
turn the map lights on or off.
O (On/Off): Press to turn the dimming feature on
or off.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust for compass variance:
Compass Calibration
1. Find the current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.
If after a few seconds the display does not show a
compass direction, (N for North for example), there may
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Interference can be caused by a magnetic antenna
mount, note pad holder, or similar object. If CAL appears
in the compass window, the compass may need to be
reset or calibrated.
To calibrate the compass:
1. Make sure CAL is displayed. If CAL is not displayed,
press and hold the compass button until CAL
displays.
2. While CAL displays, drive the vehicle in circles at
5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads a
direction.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set to zone eight. If you do not live in zone
eight or drive out of the area, the compass variance
needs to be changed to the appropriate zone.
2. Press and hold the compass button until a Z and a
zone number displays.
3. Once the zone number displays, press the compass
button repeatedly until the correct zone number is
reached. If CAL displays in the compass window,
the compass may need calibration. See “Compass
Calibration” listed previously.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep the selector switch in the center position when not
adjusting either outside mirror.
Outside Power Mirrors
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when
going through an automatic car wash. To fold, push the
mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to
return to its original position.
Controls for the outside
power mirrors are located
on the driver door armrest.
Blind Spot Mirrors
The blind spot mirror is a small convex mirror built into
the upper and outer corner of both outside mirrors.
It is designed to increase driver visibility and show
objects that may be in the vehicle’s blind zone.
Driving with the Blind Spot Mirror
1. Press the left or right side of the selector switch
located beneath the control pad, to select the
driver or passenger mirror.
The illustration represents how a vehicle appears in the
blind spot mirror when a vehicle is approaching the
blind zone.
2. Press one of the four buttons located on the control
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the
vehicle and the area behind it can be seen.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. When the approaching vehicle is a long distance
away, the image in the main mirror is small and
near the inboard edge of the mirror.
2. As the vehicle gets closer, the image in the main
mirror gets larger and moves outboard.
3. As the vehicle enters the blind zone, the image
transitions from the main mirror to the blind spot
mirror.
4. When the vehicle is completely in the blind zone,
the image will only appear in the blind spot mirror
and is entirely off the main mirror.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Outside Mirror with the Blind
Spot Mirror
Outside Convex Mirror
1. Set the main mirror so that your vehicle can just be
seen and your blind spot mirror has a clear
unobstructed view.
{ CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
2. When checking for traffic or before changing a lane,
look at the main driver/passenger side mirror to
observe traffic in the adjacent lane, behind your
vehicle. Check the blind spot mirror for a vehicle
in the blind zone. Then, glance over your shoulder
to double check before moving slowly into the
adjacent lane.
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could
hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Object Detection Systems
CAUTION: (Continued)
Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
So if you do not use proper care before backing
up, you could hit a vehicle, child, pedestrian,
bicyclist, or pet, resulting in vehicle damage,
injury, or death. Even though the vehicle has the
RVC system, always check carefully before
backing up by checking behind and around the
vehicle.
The vehicle may have a Rear Vision Camera system.
Read this entire section before using it.
{ CAUTION:
The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) system does not
replace driver vision. RVC does not:
• Detect objects that are outside the camera’s
field of view, below the bumper, or
underneath the vehicle.
• Detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
The rear vision camera system is designed to help the
driver when backing up by displaying a view of the area
behind the vehicle. When the key is in the ON/RUN
position and the driver shifts the vehicle into R (Reverse),
the video image automatically appears on the inside rear
view mirror. Once the driver shifts out of R (Reverse), the
video image automatically disappears from the inside
rear view mirror.
Do not back the vehicle by only looking at the rear
vision camera screen, or use the screen during
longer, higher speed backing maneuvers or where
there could be cross-traffic. Your judged distances
using the screen will differ from actual distances.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning the Rear Vision Camera System
Off or On
Rear Vision Camera Location
The camera is located in the rear of the vehicle.
To turn off the rear vision camera system, press and
hold z , located on the inside rearview mirror, until the
left indicator light turns off. The rear vision camera
display is now disabled.
To turn the rear vision camera system on again, press
and hold z until the left indicator light illuminates.
The rear vision camera system display is now enabled
and the display will appear in the mirror normally.
The area displayed by the camera is limited and does
not display objects that are close to either corner or under
the bumper. The area displayed can vary depending on
vehicle orientation or road conditions. The distance of the
image that appears on the screen differs from the actual
distance.
The following illustration shows the field of view that the
camera provides.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the System Does Not Seem To
Work Properly
The rear vision camera system might not work properly
or display a clear image if:
• The RVC is turned off. See “Turning the Rear
Camera System On or Off” earlier in this section.
• It is dark.
• The sun or the beam of headlights is shining
directly into the camera lens.
• Ice, snow, mud, or anything else builds up on the
camera lens. Clean the lens, rinse it with water,
and wipe it with a soft cloth.
• The back of the vehicle is in an accident, the
position and mounting angle of the camera
can change or the camera can be affected.
Be sure to have the camera and its position and
mounting angle checked at your dealer/retailer.
• There are extreme temperature changes.
A. View displayed by the camera.
B. Corner of the rear bumper.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
The rear vision camera system display in the rearview
mirror may turn off or not appear as expected due to one
of the following conditions. If this occurs the left indicator
light on the mirror will flash.
• A slow flash may indicate a loss of video signal, or no
video signal present during the reverse cycle.
• A fast flash may indicate that the display has been on
for the maximum allowable time during a reverse
cycle, or the display has reached an Over
Temperature limit.
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services. If the airbags
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic
call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request
emergency services be sent to your location. If the keys
are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
to have a signal sent to unlock the doors. OnStar
Hands-Free Calling, including 30 trial minutes good
for 60 days, is available on most vehicles. OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation service, with one trial route, is
available on most vehicles. Press the OnStar button to
have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service.
The fast flash conditions are used to protect the video
device from high temperature conditions. Once
conditions return to normal the device will reset and
the green indicator will stop flashing.
During any of these fault conditions, the display will be
blank and the indicator will continue to flash as long
as the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or until the conditions
return to normal.
Pressing and holding z when the left indicator light is
flashing will turn off the video display along with the
left indicator light.
OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
glove box literature.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until
the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar. After the
first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select a monthly
or annual subscription payment plan. If a payment plan
is not selected, the OnStar system and all services,
including airbag notification and emergency services,
may be deactivated and no longer available. For more
information visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca (Canada),
or press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor.
OnStar Services Available with the
Safe & Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email
• GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles.
To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services
described below, or for a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s
Guide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) or
onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the
OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours
a day, 7 days a week.
OnStar Services Included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Virtual Advisor
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into the
vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid Minute
Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes good
for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also be linked to a
Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a Bell
Mobility service plan in Canada, depending on eligibility.
To find out more, refer to the OnStar Owner’s Guide in
the vehicle’s glove box, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, or
speak with an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar
button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar Hands-Free
Calling that uses minutes to access location-based
weather, local traffic reports, and stock quotes. Press
the phone button and give a few simple voice commands
to browse through the various topics. See the OnStar
Owner’s Guide for more information. This feature is only
available in the continental U.S.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be
used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
more information.
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
Vehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
system can provide voice-guided driving directions.
Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor
locate a business or address and download driving
directions to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to the
desired destination will play through the audio system
speakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
How OnStar Service Works
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed,
the emergency button is pressed, or if the airbags or
AACN system deploy. This information usually includes
the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle
was involved in (e.g. the direction from which the vehicle
was hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling is used, the vehicle also sends
OnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they can provide
services where it is located.
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons
is red, the system may not be functioning properly.
Press the OnStar button and request a vehicle
diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and
all services have been deactivated. Press the OnStar
button to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity and reception when
the service is needed, and technology that is compatible
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas,
or at all times.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Floor Console Storage Area
Storage Areas
There are two small storage compartments on the floor
console.
Glove Box
Lift up on the glove box lever to open it.
Rear Storage Area
Cupholders
There are two cupholders located in the floor console
between the front seats. There is also a cupholder
for the rear seat passenger located at the rear of the
floor console.
If your vehicle is an SS model, the automatic
transmission vehicles have a cupholder in front of the
shift lever.
Cupholders have inserts that can be removed for
cleaning.
Instrument Panel Storage
Your vehicle has a storage compartment on the
instrument panel above the air vents. Push the button
on the compartment to open the cover.
Your vehicle may have two rear storage areas that can
be used for small items.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The panel can be used in this position if you need
additional space above the panel. Place the cargo on
top of the panel in this position.
Rear Compartment Storage
Panel/Cover
Your vehicle may have an adjustable panel/cargo cover
feature. The panel/cargo cover can be adjusted into
four positions.
{ CAUTION:
If you were to carry things on the adjustable panel
when it is in the upper (cargo cover) or center
positions, during a sudden vehicle movement or a
crash, those things could be thrown around in the
vehicle. You or others could be injured. When it is
in the upper or center position, always secure any
cargo on the floor beneath the panel/cover.
To use the panel in the first position:
1. Insert the front corners of the panel into the lower
guides.
2. Slide the panel forward.
3. Press down on the back of the panel to lock it in
place.
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The third position is with the front corners placed in
the lower guides and the rear corners placed in
the upper guides. Do not load cargo on the panel
in this position.
The fourth position is with the front corners placed in
the lower guides closest to the rear seat for subfloor
access. Do not drive while the panel is in this position.
The panel can be used as a cargo cover for the
rear area. It has hooks underneath for shopping bags.
Your vehicle may have a cargo mat that covers the
panel/cargo cover.
To use the panel in the second position:
1. Insert the front corners of the panel into the top
guides.
2. Slide the panel forward.
3. Press down on the back of the panel to lock it in
place.
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Loading cargo directly on the roof of the
vehicle may cause damage to the vehicle and would
not be covered under warranty. Do not place
cargo on the roof the vehicle.
Roof Rack System
Your vehicle may be equipped with a roof rack system.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
page 4-25.
{ CAUTION:
If something is carried on top of the vehicle that is
longer or wider than the luggage carrier — like
paneling, plywood, or a mattress — the wind can
catch it while the vehicle is being driven. This can
cause a driver to lose control. The item being
carried could be violently torn off, and this could
cause a collision, and damage the vehicle. Items
may be carried inside. Never carry something
longer or wider than the luggage carrier on top of
the vehicle.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving,
check frequently to ensure your cargo is securely
fastened.
The roof rack system has siderails that are attached to
the roof. All cargo must be loaded on the luggage
carrier crossrails only.
Use GM accessory racks that are compatible with your
roof rack system, these are available at your GM dealer.
Convenience Net
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 150 lbs (68 kg) or hangs over
the rear sides of the vehicle may damage your
vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats
as far forward as possible and against the side
rails making sure to fasten it securely.
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. The metal
rings in the cargo area can be used to attach the
convenience net for several uses. The net can be used
to attach items secured to the floor, to the rear liftgate
or liftgate glass. The net is not for larger, heavier loads.
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hideaway Rear Storage Bins
There is a rod that hooks into place to prop open the
lid. Push the rod towards the lid to unhook it and lower
the lid.
Your vehicle may have two storage bins located in the
rear of the vehicle. Pull up on the handles to open
and lift the lid. Use the key to lock/unlock the bins.
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vent Open: To open to the vent position from the closed
position, press and hold the passenger’s side sunroof
switch forward. The rear of the sunroof panel will tilt
upward to the full vent position. The sunshade must be
opened manually.
Sunroof
The vehicle may have a power sunroof.
The switches that operate
the sunroof are located in
the headliner.
Express Close: To express close the power sunroof,
fully press the driver’s side switch forward once. To stop
the sunroof glass in a desired position other than closed,
press the switch again in either direction. The sunshade
must be closed manually.
Close: To close the power sunroof, operate the controls
according to one of the following:
• From the open position, press and hold the driver’s
side sunroof switch forward. The sunshade must be
closed manually.
• From the vent position, press and hold the
passenger’s side sunroof switch rearward.
To open or close the sunroof, the ignition must be in
ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) must be active. See Retained Accessory
Anti-Pinch: If an object is in the path of the sunroof while
it is closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the object
and stop the sunroof from closing at the point of the
obstruction. The sunroof will then return to the full-open
or vent position. To close the sunroof once it has
re-opened, refer to the two options previously described
under the “Close” feature instructions.
Express Open: To express open the power sunroof,
fully press the driver’s side switch rearward once.
To stop the sunroof glass in a desired position other
than to the express-open position, press the switch
again, in either direction, to stop the movement. If the
sunshade is in the closed position, it will open with
the sunroof, or it can be opened manually.
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
(If Equipped).
(If Equipped). Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
(If Equipped) and Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped).
page 2-12 (If Equipped).
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel lets the steering wheel be adjusted before
driving.
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button
located on the instrument panel, to make the front and
rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble.
Press | again to turn the flashers off.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbols located on
the steering wheel.
The tilt lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
To tilt the wheel, pull the lever down. Then, move the
wheel to a comfortable position and raise the lever
to lock the wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash
to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane
change is complete.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
The lever returns to its starting position when it is
released.
G : Turn and Lane-Change Signals
If after signaling a turn or a lane change the arrows
flash rapidly or does not come on, a signal bulb may be
burned out.
5 3: Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
O : Exterior Lamp Control
Flash-to-Pass.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
page 5-109.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers
To change the headlamps from low beam to high
beam, push the turn signal lever away from you.
This indicator light appears
on the instrument panel
cluster when the high
beams are on.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
The windshield wiper lever is located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
Flash-to-Pass
Move the lever to one of the following positions:
1 (High Speed): For steady wiping at high speed.
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed.
& (Delay): Use to set a delay between wipes.
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
release the lever to turn them off.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades before using
them. If the blades are frozen to the windshield, gently
loosen or thaw them. If they become damaged, install
new blades or blade inserts. See Windshield Wiper Blade
6 (Delay/Intermittent Speed Sensitive): When the lever
is in the delay position, move the intermittent adjust band
to set for shorter or longer delay cycles. To the left of the
adjust band are bars that indicate the frequency of the
wipes. Smaller bars mean the wiper movement is less
frequent. Larger bars mean the wiper movement is more
frequent.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
During intermittent wiping mode, the delay cycle time
is sensitive to vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed
increases the delay cycle time will decrease and wiper
movement occurs more frequently.
Windshield Washer
To wash the windshield, press the button at the end of
the lever until the washers begin.
9 (Off): Turns off the windshield wipers.
8 (Mist): Move the lever to mist, for a single wiping
cycle and then release it. The windshield wipers will stop
after one wipe and the lever returns to its original position.
Hold the band on mist longer for continuous wipes.
{ CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on for more
than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlamps will turn on
automatically. They will turn off 15 seconds after
the wipers are turned off.
When the button is released, the washers will stop, but
the wipers will continue to wipe for about three times
or will resume the speed being used before.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as the
windshield washer. However, the rear window washer
will run out of fluid before the windshield washer. If the
windshield can be washed, but not the rear windows,
check the fluid level.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear window
washer/wiper button is
located on the instrument
panel below the climate
controls.
Z (Rear Wiper): Press to turn on an intermittent
setting that has a shorter delay.
To turn either of the intermittent wiper settings off, press
the opposite side of the button to turn it to the off position.
Pressing the button all the way down on either side will
activate an intermittent wiper setting.
{ CAUTION:
Cruise Control
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on
the accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speeds
below 25 mph (40 km/h).
The brake must be applied at least one time, after the
vehicle has been started, before cruise control will
function.
5 (Delay): Press to turn on the intermittent wiping
setting that has a longer delay.
Y (Washer Fluid): Press to wash and wipe the window.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The cruise control buttons
are located on the left side
of the steering wheel.
{ CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not
use the cruise control on winding roads or in
heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.
On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
J (On/Off): Press to turn the cruise control system on
and off. The indicator light on the button comes on
when the cruise control is on and goes off when
the cruise control is turned off.
Setting Cruise Control
RES+ (Resume): Press to resume a set speed and to
accelerate the speed.
{ CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you are not
using cruise, you might hit a button and go into
cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SET− (Set): Press to set a speed and to decrease the
speed.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose the cruise control is set at a desired speed and
then the brake is applied. This disengages the cruise
control. To return to the previously set speed, you do
not need to go through the set process again. Once the
vehicle is going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, press
the RES+ part of the button briefly.
To set a speed do the following:
1. Press I to turn cruise control on. The indicator
light on the button will come on.
2. Get to the desired speed.
The vehicle goes back to the previously set speed.
3. Press the SET− control button and release it.
The CRUISE ENGAGED message will appear
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) to show
the system is engaged.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
1. Disengage the cruise control by applying the brake
pedal, but do not turn it off. Accelerate to a higher
speed and reset the cruise control.
When you apply the brakes or operate the clutch pedal,
the cruise control will shut off.
If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction
Control System (TCS) begins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise control will automatically disengage. See Traction
conditions allow, the cruise control can be used again.
2. If the cruise control system is already engaged,
press the RES+ button. Hold it there until the
desired speed is reached, and then release the
button. To increase the vehicle speed in small
amounts, press the RES+ button briefly and then
release it. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When going downhill, you might have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep the vehicle speed down. When the
brakes are applied the cruise control turns off.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If the cruise control system is already engaged,
Ending Cruise Control
• Push and hold the SET− button until the lower
To end cruise control, step lightly on the brake
pedal or the clutch pedal if the vehicle has a manual
transmission.
speed desired is reached, then release it.
• To slow down in small amounts, push the SET−
button briefly. Each time this is done, the vehicle
goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Stepping on the brake pedal or clutch pedal will only
end the current cruise control session.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Press I to turn the system completely off.
Erasing Speed Memory
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle slows
down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control will work on hills depends
upon the vehicle speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle speed.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): Automatically
turns on the Daytime Running Lamps during daytime, and
the headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps at night.
Headlamps
P (Off/On): This position is the momentary Off/On
switch for the Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada,
this only works when the vehicles with an automatic
transmission are in P (Park) and vehicles with a manual
transmission have the parking brake set and the
vehicle is not moving.
When operating in AUTO, a momentary turn of the
switch to off/on will turn off the Automatic Headlamp
System. An AUTO LIGHTS OFF message displays on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) and a chime will
sound. Turning the switch to off/on again will turn the
Automatic Headlamp System back on. An AUTO LIGHTS
ON message displays on the DIC. The Automatic
Headlamp System is always turned on at the beginning of
an ignition cycle for vehicles with manual transmission.
The lever on the left side of the steering column operates
the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp switch has the following four positions:
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, parking
lamps, and taillamps.
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps and
taillamps only.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle has a light sensor on top of the instrument
panel. Do not cover this sensor or the headlamps
will come on when they are not needed.
Wiper Activated Headlamps
The headlamps and parking lamps are activated
15 seconds after the windshield wipers are turned on.
For this feature to work, automatic lighting must be
information.
The DRL system will make the headlamps come on
at reduced brightness when the following conditions
are met:
• The ignition is on.
When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activated
headlamps will immediately turn off. They also turn off
15 seconds after the windshield wiper control is
turned off.
• The exterior lamp control is turned to AUTO.
• The light sensor detects daytime light.
• The shift lever is not in P (Park).
While the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker
lamps, and instrument panel lights will not be on.
Headlamps on Reminder
If the drivers door is opened with the ignition off and the
lamps on, a warning chime will sound. This indicates
that the headlamps are still on.
For vehicles with an Automatic Transmission, the
DRL system is off any time the vehicle is in P (Park).
For vehicles with a Manual Transmission, the DRL
system will be off when the vehicle is first started, the
park brake is applied, and the vehicle has not moved.
The DRL system on U.S. vehicles can also be turned
off by using the off/on switch for one ignition cycle.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on
all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The regular headlamp system should be turned on when
needed.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To idle the vehicle with the system off, turn the ignition
on and turn the exterior light switch to the off/on position.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the transmission must
stay in P (Park) for this function or the parking brake must
be set for vehicles with manual transmissions.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, the automatic system
turns on the headlamps at the normal brightness along
with other lamps such as the taillamps, sidemarker,
parking lamps, instrument panel lights, and interior switch
backlighting.
Turn on the regular headlamps when they are needed.
Do not cover the light sensor, located on top of the
instrument panel. If the sensor is covered the headlamps
may remain on when they are not needed.
Fog Lamps
For vehicles with fog lamps, the button is located on the
instrument panel, to the right of the steering wheel.
If the vehicle is driven through a parking garage, overcast
weather or a tunnel, the automatic headlamp system may
turn on.
The ignition must be on to use the fog lamps.
# : Press to turn the fog lamps on and off. An indicator
light on the button comes on when the fog lamps are on.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the automatic lamp control
system so that driving under bridges or bright overhead
street lights does not affect the system. The automatic
lamp control system will only be affected when the light
sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer than this
delay.
The parking lamps automatically turn on and off when the
fog lamps are turned on and off.
The fog lamps will turn off while the high-beam
headlamps are turned on.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
lamp system turns on immediately. Once the vehicle
exits the garage, it will take about 20 seconds for the
automatic lamp system to change to DRL if it is light
outside. During that delay, the instrument panel cluster
may not be as bright as usual. Make sure the instrument
panel brightness control is in the full bright position.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Entry/Exit Lighting
The lamps inside the vehicle turn on when any door
is opened. These lamps will fade out after about
20 seconds after all of the doors have been closed or
when the ignition is turned to ON/RUN. These lamps will
also turn on when pressing the unlock symbol button or
the horn symbol on the keyless entry system transmitter.
The control for this feature
is located to the right of
the steering wheel
and above the radio.
The lamps inside the vehicle will stay on for about
20 seconds after the key is removed from the ignition to
provide an illuminated exit.
Move the thumbwheel to the left to dim the lights or to
the right to brighten the lights.
Mirror Reading Lamps
The dome lamps will turn on when the thumbwheel is
moved completely to the right.
The vehicle may have reading lamps on the rearview
mirror. Push the button to turn the reading lamps on and
off. The reading lamps will automatically come on when a
door is open.
Dome Lamp
Move the lever to the following positions:
9 (Off): Turns the lamp off, even when a door is
opened.
Rear Reading Lamps
1 (Door): Turns the lamp on whenever a door is
Push the lens to turn the reading lamps on and off.
opened.
The dome lamp and mirror reading lamps will turn on if
the lever is in the door position and the instrument
panel brightness control is turned to the brightest setting.
+ (On): Turns on the dome lamp.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of
some accessories.
Electric Power Management
This vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM),
an advanced control system. It estimates the battery’s
temperature and state of charge and then adjusts the
voltage for best performance and extended life of the
battery.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels
of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to
the driver.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in. When the
state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly to
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage
or voltage display on the Driver Information Center (DIC),
you may see the voltage move up or down. This is
Battery Run-Down Protection
normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed.
The vehicle has a battery saver feature designed to
protect the vehicle’s battery.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning
fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is
needed for very high electrical loads.
When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition is
turned off, the battery rundown protection system
automatically turns the lamp off after 20 minutes.
This prevents draining of the battery.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high
speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads,
and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of
20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
electrical equipment, such as a cellular phone.
The accessory power outlets are located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls and at the
rear of the center console. There may be an outlet in the
rear cargo area on the passenger side.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
To use the outlet, remove the cover. While not in use,
always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug because the power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible with
the accessory power outlet and could result in blown
vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem,
see your dealer/retailer for additional information on the
accessory power outlet.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This plug can be used to supply power to commercial
converters and contains four different circuits. The
functions of these circuits are as follows; a 40 Amp
battery service, a 10 Amp Accessory or Run service, a
15 Amp Delayed Accessory service and a Ground circuit.
Rear Power Plug for Converters
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 40 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug because the power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
The vehicle may have a power plug connector located
in the rear cargo area on the passenger side behind
the service panel. The power connector wiring can
be accessed by removing the service panel to begin
installation.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum 40 ampere rating.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Climate Controls
The vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.
To use the lighter, located on the instrument panel below
the climate controls, push it in all the way and let go.
When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can
be controlled with this system.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of
15 amperes.
For vehicles with remote start, the climate control
system comes on and uses the prior temperature
settings selected before you exited the vehicle.
To clean the center console ashtray, remove the entire
ashtray and empty it.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items are
put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage the
vehicle. Never put flammable items in the ashtray.
A. Temperature Control E. Outside Air
B. Fan Control
C. Air Delivery Mode
Control
F. Recirculation
G. Rear Window
Defogger
D. Air Conditioning
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 (Off): Turn the fan control to this position to turn the
fan off.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with
some air directed to the windshield and side windows.
Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature.
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, side window,
and floor outlets. In this mode, the system runs the air
conditioning compressor. To defog the windows faster,
turn the temperature control knob clockwise to the
warmest setting.
9 (Fan): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the fan speed. In any setting other
than off, the fan runs continuously with the ignition on.
The fan must be turned on to run the air conditioning (AC)
compressor.
0 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frost from
the windshield more quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield, with some air directed to the side window
and floor outlets. In this mode, the system runs the
air conditioning compressor. To defrost the windows
faster, turn the temperature control knob clockwise
to the warmest setting.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow
inside the vehicle.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
# (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air conditioning
system on or off. An indicator light comes on to show
that the air conditioning is on.
outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
panel outlets and the floor outlets.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For quick cool down on hot days:
1. Select H .
The air conditioning compressor also comes on.
Recirculation is not available in floor, defog and defrost
modes. If the recirculation button is pressed, the indicator
light flashes five times and outside air will be delivered.
Operation in this mode during periods of high humidity
and cool outside temperatures may result in increased
window fogging. If window fogging is experienced, select
the defrost mode.
2. Select @ .
3. Select # .
4. Select the coolest temperature.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
; (Outside Air): Press to allow outside air to circulate
through the vehicle. An indicator light comes on to show
that outside air is on.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of the vehicle to become
too dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in
the vehicle has cooled, turn off the recirculation by
pressing the outside air button.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so a small amount of water might drip under
the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
The rear window defogger only works when the ignition
is in ON/RUN.
The air conditioning compressor cannot be turned on
when the fan is off.
< (Rear): Press to turn the rear window defogger on or
off. Be sure to clear as much snow from the rear window
as possible. An indicator light comes on to show that the
rear window defogger is on.
@ (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
mode on. An indicator light comes on to show that
recirculation is on.
The rear window defogger turns off approximately
15 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned
on again, the defogger only runs for approximately
seven minutes before turning off.
This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air
inside the vehicle. It can be used to help prevent outside
air and odors from entering the vehicle.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle speed is greater than 50 mph (80 km/h)
and the rear defogger is on, it remains on as long as the
speed is greater than 50 mph (80 km/h). The defogger
can also be turned off by turning off the engine.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into the vehicle.
For vehicles with the remote start feature, the rear
defogger automatically turns on if it is cold outside. When
the vehicle transitions out of the remote start mode, the
rear defogger turns off. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2-4
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more
effectively.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside
of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The filter removes dust and pollen from the air which is
drawn into the vehicle. Airflow reduction is an indication
that the filter needs to be replaced.
The filter should be replaced as part of routine scheduled
for replacement intervals. To find out what type of filter to
Outlet Adjustment
Turn the outlets and move the outlet vanes to change
the direction of the airflow and to open and close
the outlets.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To access the passenger compartment air filter:
1. Open and empty the glove box.
3. Pull the three tabs of the filter access door down
and open the access door downward.
2. Press both glove box stops outward to let the glove
box drop open completely.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is
started to indicate they are working.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to indicate a problem with
the vehicle.
4. Pull the filter out toward you, keeping it facing
upwards.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there may
be a problem, check the section that explains what to do.
Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly and even dangerous.
Install the new air filter with the AIR FLOW arrow
pointing downward. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to
reassemble.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to show how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is going,
about how much fuel is left in the fuel tank, and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.
United States Manual Transmission Cluster shown, Automatic, SS and Canada similar
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
The speedometer shows the speed in both miles per
hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The tachometer
displays the engine
speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM).
The vehicle’s odometer works together with the Driver
Information Center (DIC). Trip A and Trip B can be
set on the odometer. See “Trip Information” under DIC
The vehicle does not have to be running to check the
odometer mileage. Simply open the driver’s door and the
mileage briefly displays.
If the vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the
new one will be set to the correct total mileage of the old
odometer.
Notice: If the engine is operated with the
tachometer in the red warning area, the vehicle
could be damaged and the damages would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not operate the
engine with the tachometer in the red warning area.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Safety Belt Reminders
Several seconds after the engine is started,
a chime sounds for several seconds to remind
the front passenger to buckle their safety belt.
This only occurs if the passenger airbag is enabled.
page 1-72 for more information. The passenger safety
belt light, located on the instrument panel, comes on
and stays on for several seconds and then flashes for
several more.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for
several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety
belt, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light comes
on and stays on for
several seconds, then
flashes for several more.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor
the light comes on.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime
may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or
chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Readiness Light
{ CAUTION:
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing
and diagnostic module. For more information on the
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is
started. If the light does
not come on then, have it
fixed immediately.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come
for more information.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
The vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
page 1-72 for important safety information. The
instrument panel has a passenger airbag status indicator.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may
be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
{ CAUTION:
United States
Canada
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
for more information, including important safety
information.
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and
off, for several seconds as a system check. If you are
using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance, if
equipped, you may not see the system check. Then, after
several more seconds, the status indicator will light either
ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to let you know
the status of the right front passenger frontal airbag.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
Up-Shift Light
This light comes on briefly
The vehicle may have an
up-shift light.
when the ignition key is
turned on, but the engine is
not running, as a check
to show it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays on,
or comes on while driving, there could be a problem with
the charging system or it could indicate that there are
problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If the
vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light on,
to turn off the accessories, such as the radio and air
conditioner.
When this light comes on, shift to the next higher gear if
weather, road, and traffic conditions allow.
more information.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
also comes on when the parking brake is set. The light
stays on if the parking brake does not fully release. If it
stays on after the parking brake is fully released, it means
the vehicle has a brake problem.
Brake System Warning Light
The vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop the vehicle. For good braking both
parts need to be working well.
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road
and stop carefully. Make sure the parking brake is fully
released. The pedal might be harder to push or, the pedal
could go closer to the floor. It can take longer to stop.
Try turning off and restarting the vehicle one or two times,
if the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have the brake system inspected right away.
{ CAUTION:
United States
Canada
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
This light should come on briefly when the engine is
started. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn if there is a problem.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
Indicator/Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine is
started.
For vehicles with the
Enhanced Traction System
(ETS), this light serves
as an indicator and
warning light.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
This light comes on briefly while the engine is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator
light then goes off.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or
comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service.
If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the
vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on, the vehicle
does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with
page 3-33.
If the indicator/warning light is on and not flashing, the
ETS system could have been disabled. Check all related
Driver Information Center (DIC) messages to determine
whether the system has been turned off or if the system
is not working properly and the vehicle requires service.
If the ETS has been disabled, wheel spin is not limited.
If the indicator/warning light is on and flashing, the ETS
is actively working. The LOW TRACTION DIC message
also appears when the system is actively limiting
wheel spin.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see
brake related DIC messages.
information.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the light comes on and stays on, the TCS and
potentially the ESC system have been disabled.
Check the DIC messaging to determine which system is
turned off, or not working. If the system is not working,
the vehicle needs service. See your dealer/retailer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/
Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light
When the TCS is disabled, wheel spin is not limited.
When the ESC system is disabled, the system does not
aid in maintaining vehicle directional control.
The Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system
or the Traction Control
System (TCS) indicator/
warning light comes on
briefly when the engine is
started.
If the light comes on and flashes, the TCS or the ESC
system is actively working. When the LOW TRACTION
message appears, the system is limiting wheel spin.
When the ESC ACTIVE message appears, the system
is aiding in maintaining vehicle directional control.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light goes off.
more information.
This light, along with the appropriate Driver Information
Center (DIC) messages, indicates when the ESC
system and the TCS are working or are disabled.
more information on the messages associated with
this light.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
The vehicle has an engine
coolant temperature gage.
With the ignition turned to
ON/RUN, this gage shows
the engine coolant
This light comes on briefly
while starting the vehicle.
temperature.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light goes off.
If the gage pointer moves into the red area, the engine
is too hot because the engine coolant has overheated.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause the vehicle to overheat.
engine could be damaged, and it might not be
If the vehicle is operating under normal driving
conditions, pull off the road, stop the vehicle and
turn off the engine as soon as possible.
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive with
the engine coolant temperature warning light on.
The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on
when the engine has overheated.
If this happens pull over and turn off the engine as soon
for more information.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with a tire
pressure monitoring
system, this light comes
on briefly when the engine
is started.
This indicates that there could be a problem with the Tire
Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about a
minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition
for more information.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
It provides information about tire pressures and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System.
When the Light is On Steady
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly
underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information Center
(DIC), can accompany the light. See DIC Warnings and
check the tires as soon as it is safe to do so. If a tire is
underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure. See Tires
on page 5-53 for more information.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light should come on
when the ignition is on, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
is working. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.
This could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before any
problem is apparent. Being aware of the light can prevent
more serious damage to the vehicle. This system assists
the service technician in correctly diagnosing any
malfunction.
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damage
the emission control system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls might
not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine might not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that might
not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
• If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being
hauled as soon as it is possible.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous
steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon
as possible.
• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poor
fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently
as designed and can cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear,
misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on
acceleration. These conditions might go away once
the engine is warmed up.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank of
the proper fuel to turn the light off.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
• If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle
of water, the vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.
The condition is usually corrected when the electrical
system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the
light off.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Oil Pressure Light
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on with the engine running, or if the
key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.
{ CAUTION:
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection. This
can happen if the battery has recently been replaced
or if the battery has run down. The diagnostic system
is designed to evaluate critical emission control
systems during normal driving. This can take several
days of routine driving. If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of
OBD II system readiness, your dealer/retailer can
prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator
light then goes off.
Fog Lamp Light
The fog lamp light comes
on when the fog lamps are
in use.
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is
not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and it might have some other system
problem.
Security Light
The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
page 2-19.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
for more information.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The gage moves a little when the vehicle turns a
corner or speeds up.
Fuel Gage
The fuel gage indicates
about how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank.
• The gage does not go back to empty when the
ignition is turned off.
For the fuel tank capacity, see Capacities and
Boost Gage
An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with the fuel gage:
• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
United States
Canada
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the fuel tank’s capacity
to fill it.
For vehicles with this gage, it indicates vacuum during
light to moderate throttle and boost under heavier
throttle.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This gage displays the air pressure level in the intake
manifold before it enters the engine’s combustion
chamber.
It is automatically centered at zero every time the
engine is started. Actual vacuum or boost is displayed
from this zero point. Changes in ambient pressure, such
as driving in mountains and changing weather, will
slightly change the zero reading.
Reconfigurable Performance
Display (RPD)
For vehicles with the RPD, the screen displays
information that can be used to monitor vehicle
performance. The RPD knob located next to the screen
is used to configure the display and select information
to be viewed.
RPD Screen Example US Version Shown, Canada
Similar (French Display Currently Not Available)
The RPD screen displays two divided areas (A, B) of
information called Regions. Advance through Region A
screens to show various gages and speedometer
displays. Advance through Region B screens to show
digital readouts and indicator information.
A short video plays whenever the ignition key is turned
on. Press the RPD knob to stop the video and go directly
to RPD displays.
The position of these regions can be reversed. See the
SETUP MENU for more information.
When the ignition is turned off and then back on, the
RPD shows the last screen displayed.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPEEDOMETER & G FORCE: The G FORCE meter
displays lateral acceleration. While turning right, G forces
are felt on the left, and vice versa. PEAK values are
stored indefinitely, and can be reset with a press and hold
of the RPD knob while viewing the G FORCE meter.
Region A Gage and Speedometer
Displays
Change the information displayed in Region A by
turning the knob either clockwise or counterclockwise.
The available gages are:
SETUP MENU: Press the RPD knob to enter this menu.
The vehicle should be stopped while configuring the
setup menu selections.
BOOST: Displays positive boost pressure as
determined by the manifold air pressure (MAP) sensor.
SCREEN OFF: Turns the screen off.
AIR/FUEL RATIO: Displays the mass ratio of air
to fuel.
Region B Readout Displays
CAM PHASER ANGLES: Displays orientation of the
intake and exhaust cam shafts relative to their park
positions as commanded by the engine control module.
OVERLAP represents the total distance the intake and
exhaust cam shafts have phased.
Press the RPD knob to highlight Region B. The
information displayed can be changed by turning
the RPD knob either clockwise or counterclockwise.
Press the RPD knob again, to store the selection.
The selection will also be stored after a few seconds
of no activity. Available modes are:
SPARK ADVANCE/ KNOCK RETARD: The spark
advance gage displays ignition timing. Knock retard
indicates the amount of ignition delay to reduce spark
knock.
Readouts #1
SHIFT LIGHTS/GEAR INDICATION: The shift lights
provide visual identification of engine speed for a
transmission gear. Shift light minimum and maximum
RPM settings can be viewed and configured in the
SETUP screen.
ENGINE POWER & TORQUE: Displayed engine power
and torque are engine flywheel output values calculated
by the engine control module. These values are
approximate and may change with the air conditioning
load, generator output, air temperature, air pressure, and
fuel octane.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Readouts #2
INDICATORS
The indicators come on when the corresponding function
is actively working to stabilize or control the vehicle. Each
indicator light on the RPD display can be turned on and
off using the SETUP MENU. These indicators work
independently of the telltales on the instrument panel
cluster. Turning the indicator on the RPD display on or off
does not enable or disable the functions on the vehicle.
TIRE PRESSURES: Displays the last gage tire
pressures recorded from each of the wheel mounted
tire pressure sensors.
Readouts #3
BAROMETER: Displays ambient air pressure as
measured by the engine’s ambient pressure sensor.
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE: Displays ambient
temperature as measured by an outside air temperature
sensor.
BATTERY VOLTAGE: Displays the vehicle’s battery
voltage.
Readouts #4
This indicator comes on whenever the vehicle
StabiliTrak® is actively working.
COOLANT TEMPERATURE: Displays engine coolant
temperature as measured by a coolant temperature
sensor.
INLET AIR TEMPERATURE: Displays the
instantaneous temperature of the air at the inlet to the
induction system.
FUEL PRESSURE: Displays fuel pressure as
measured by a sensor on the output of the
high-pressure fuel pump.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP MENU
The SETUP MENU allows for the appearance of each
display screen to be customized. Turn the knob to scroll
through the screens to reach the SETUP MENU. Press
and release the knob to activate the SETUP MENU.
This indicator comes on when Competitive Driving
Mode (A) has been set using the traction control switch.
This telltale comes on whenever conditions are right
for the Launch Mode (B) to activate.
more information on Competitive Driving Mode and
Launch Control.
Selecting a SETUP MENU Option
1. Under SETUP MENU there are six menu options to
choose. Turn the RPD knob to highlight an option.
This indicator comes on whenever the vehicle Traction
Control system is actively working.
2. Press and release the RPD knob to select
the highlighted menu option.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCREEN ORDER: While the screen order is highlighted,
press the knob to allow adjustment. Turn the knob to
reverse the displayed order of Region A and Region B.
Press the knob again once the screen is chosen.
SETUP MENU Options
GAUGE APPEARANCE: While the gage is highlighted,
press the RPD knob. Then turn the knob to choose
the background color for a gage. Press the knob again
when gage color is chosen.
CONTRAST: While the contrast slider is highlighted,
press the knob to allow adjustment. Turn the knob
to adjust the contrast of the screen. Press the knob
again when the desired contrast is reached.
SHIFT LIGHT SETUP: This screen establishes a RPM
range where the shift light comes on for each gear.
Turn the RPD knob to highlight a shift light setting.
Press the knob to allow adjustment of the highlighted
setting. Turn the knob to adjust the value up or down,
then press the knob again to allow the selection of
another item. The number above each gear shows
the highest RPM the light comes on for a gear range.
The number below each gear indicates the lowest
RPM the light comes on for a gear range.
RESTORE DEFAULTS: Restores the original factory
screen defaults.
Applying a SETUP MENU Option
After each screen is customized, use this procedure to
apply the change and return to the SETUP MENU.
SET: Applies the changes to the display.
INDICATORS ON/OFF: Select on or off for each
indicator by turning the RPD knob to highlight ON or OFF.
Press and Release the RPD knob to apply the choice.
The actual Traction Control, StabiliTrak®, Competitive
Mode, Launch Control functions and instrument panel
cluster telltales are not enabled or disabled by these
indicators.
1. Turn until SET is highlighted.
2. Press and release while SET is highlighted to lock
in the setting and return to the previous screen.
RETURN /RET: Returns the display to the previous
screen without saving changes.
1. Turn to highlight the RETURN/RET option.
2. Press and release knob to return to the
previous menu.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press and hold the information and reset buttons at the
same time for one second, then release the buttons
to enter the personalization menu. See DIC Vehicle
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
The DIC display gives you the status of many of your
vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used to display driver
personalization menu modes and warning/status
messages. All messages will appear in the DIC display,
located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. The DIC has
different modes which can be accessed by pressing
the DIC buttons. The button functions are detailed in the
following.
The DIC buttons are
located on the left side of
the steering wheel.
Information Modes
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through
the following vehicle information modes:
Outside Air Temperature and Odometer
Press the information button until the outside air
temperature and the odometer display. This mode shows
the temperature outside of the vehicle in either degrees
Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C) and the total
distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles (mi)
or kilometers (km). The outside air temperature appears
on the left side of the DIC display and the odometer
appears on the right side of the display.
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through
the vehicle information mode displays.
r (Reset): Press this button to reset some vehicle
information mode displays, select a personalization menu
mode setting, or acknowledge a warning message.
To change the DIC display to English or metric units,
page 3-56.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRIP A or TRIP B
MPG (L/100 KM) AVG (Average)
Press the information button until TRIP A or TRIP B
display. These modes show the current distance
traveled since the last reset for each trip odometer in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Both odometers
can be used at the same time.
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) AVG
displays. This mode shows how many miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)
your vehicle is getting based on current and past driving
conditions.
To reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold the
reset button for a few seconds while the desired
trip odometer is displayed.
To reset the average fuel economy, press and hold the
reset button while MPG (L/100 KM) AVG is displayed.
Average fuel economy is then calculated starting
from that point. If the average fuel economy is not
reset, it is continually updated each time you drive.
FUEL RANGE
Press the information button until FUEL RANGE displays.
This mode shows the remaining distance you can drive
without refueling in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
It is based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in
the tank.
MPG (L/100 KM) INST (Instantaneous)
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) INST
displays. This mode shows the current fuel economy
at a particular moment and changes frequently as
driving conditions change. This mode shows the
instantaneous fuel economy in miles per gallon (mpg)
or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike average
fuel economy, this screen cannot be reset.
When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOW displays.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is
an average of recent driving conditions. As your driving
conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
The FUEL RANGE mode cannot be reset.
AV (Average) SPEED
Press the information button until AV SPEED displays.
This mode shows the vehicle’s average speed in
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
To reset the average vehicle speed, press and hold the
reset button while AV SPEED is displayed.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the system
while driving, a message advising you to check the tire
pressure appears in the display. See Inflation - Tire
on page 3-50 for more information.
OIL LIFE
Press the information button until OIL LIFE displays.
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil’s
remaining useful life. It shows 100% when the system
is reset after an oil change. It alerts you to change the oil
on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
DIC Warnings and Messages
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil
life, additional maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine Oil
These messages appear if there is a problem detected
in one of your vehicle’s systems.
A message clears when the vehicle’s condition is no
longer present. To acknowledge a message and clear it
from the display, press and hold any of the DIC buttons.
If the condition is still present, the warning message
comes back on the next time the vehicle is turned off and
back on. With most messages, a warning chime sounds
when the message displays. Your vehicle may have other
warning messages.
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System”
COOLANT
Press the information button until COOLANT displays.
This mode shows the temperature of the engine coolant
in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFF
Tire Pressure
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is disabled with the headlamp switch.
for more information.
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be viewed in the
DIC. The tire pressure is shown in either pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the
information button until LF ## PSI (kPa) ## RF displays
for the front tires. Press the information button again until
LR ## PSI (kPa) ## RR displays for the rear tires.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON
CHECK TIRE PRESS (Pressure)
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is enabled with the headlamp switch.
for more information.
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in
one or more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked.
If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as
soon as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and
set to those shown on the Tire Loading Information
The DIC also shows the tire pressure values. See DIC
is low, the low tire pressure warning light comes on.
BRAKE FLUID
This message displays, while the ignition is on, when
the brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning
light on the instrument panel cluster also comes on.
information. Have the brake system serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
COMPETITIVE MODE
CHANGE OIL SOON
If your vehicle has this feature, this message displays
when the Competitive Driving mode is selected.
The Traction Control System (TCS) will not be operating
while in the Competitive Driving mode and the ESC/TCS
light on the instrument panel cluster will be on solid.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See Traction Control
This message displays when the life of the engine oil
has expired and it should be changed.
When this message is acknowledged and cleared from
the display, the engine oil life system must still be reset
information.
CHECK GAS CAP
This message displays if the fuel cap has not been fully
tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to make sure that it
is on properly. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the message off.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COOLING MODE ON
ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCED
This message may display on some vehicles. Under
severe conditions, hot ambient temperatures, steep
grades, and towing, your vehicle may experience more
transmission shifting. This is temporary and normal
under these conditions. This does not require engine or
transmission service.
This message displays to inform you that the vehicle
has reduced engine power to avoid damaging the engine.
Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle’s ability
to accelerate. If this message is on, but there is no
reduction in performance, proceed to your destination.
The performance may be reduced the next time the
vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a reduced
speed while this message is on, but acceleration and
speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays on,
the vehicle should be taken to your dealer/retailer for
service as soon as possible.
CRUISE ENGAGED
This message displays when the cruise control system
information.
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ACTIVE
DOOR AJAR
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster flashes when ESC is assisting
you with directional control of the vehicle. You may feel or
hear the system working and see this message displayed
in the DIC. Slippery road conditions may exist when this
message is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.
This message may stay on for a few seconds after ESC
stops assisting you with directional control of the
vehicle. This is normal when the system is operating.
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-35
for more information.
This message displays if one or more of the vehicle’s
doors are open. Make sure that the door(s) are
closed completely.
ENGINE DISABLED
This message displays if the starting of the engine is
disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer immediately.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) NOT
READY
ICE POSSIBLE
This message displays when the outside air temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC), this
message may display briefly after starting the vehicle if
the system’s sensors are not yet calibrated. The system
is not functional until the message stops displaying.
Adjust your driving accordingly. When the message is no
longer displayed, the system is functional. See Electronic
KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW
This message displays if the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace the battery in
the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” under
page 2-4.
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFF
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on solid when ESC is
turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Electronic
information.
LAUNCH CONTROL
If your vehicle has this feature, this message displays
after the COMPETITIVE MODE message when the
vehicle is stopped. Launch control is a form of traction
control to control wheel spin while launching the vehicle
during closed track events and competitive driving
venues. The system will exit to COMPETITIVE MODE
after the vehicle is launched. See “COMPETITIVE
MODE” earlier in this section. See “Launch Control”
more information.
GATE AJAR
This message displays when the liftgate is open. Make
sure that the liftgate is closed completely. See Liftgate
on page 2-12 for more information.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOW FUEL
POWER STEERING
This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel.
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. See Fuel Gage
page 5-9 for more information.
This message displays if a problem has been detected
with the electric power steering. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer immediately.
SERVICE AIR BAG
LOW TRACTION
This message displays when there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
If your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
or Traction Control System (TCS), this message displays
and the ETS light or the ESC/TCS light on the instrument
panel cluster flashes when the system is actively limiting
wheel spin. Slippery road conditions may exist if this
message is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.
This message stays on for a few seconds after the
system stops limiting wheel spin. See Enhanced Traction
SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITY
CONTROL)
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC), this
message displays and a chime sounds if there has been
a problem detected with ESC. The ESC/TCS light also
appears on the instrument panel cluster. This light stays
on solid as long as the detected problem remains
present. When this message displays, the system is not
working. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Electronic
information.
information.
PARKING BRAKE
This message displays if the parking brake is left
information.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull off the
road as soon as possible and stop carefully. Try resetting
the system by turning the ignition off and then back on.
If this message still stays on or turns back on again while
you are driving, your vehicle needs service. Have the
ESC inspected by your dealer/retailer as soon as
possible.
SVC (Service) BRAKE SYSTEM
This message may display if you have a turbocharged
vehicle with Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and if
the hydraulic brake boost is not working or is working
improperly. Have the brake system serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
SVC (Service) TIRE MONITOR
SERVICE TRACTION
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays if a part on the TPMS is
not working properly. The tire pressure light also flashes
and then remains on during the same ignition cycle. See
cause this message to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor
warning comes on and stays on, there may be a problem
with the TPMS. See your dealer/retailer.
If your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
or Traction Control System (TCS), this message displays
and a chime sounds when the system is not functioning
properly. The ETS light or the ESC/TCS light also
appears on the instrument panel cluster. This light stays
on solid as long as the detected problem remains
present. When this message displays, the system is not
working. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Enhanced
more information. Have the system serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
TRACTION OFF
If your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
or Traction Control System (TCS), this message displays
and the ETS light or the ESC/TCS light on the instrument
panel cluster comes on solid when the system is turned
off. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Enhanced
more information.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the information button to scroll through the
available personalization menu modes.
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to a preferred setting.
All of the features listed may not be available on your
vehicle. Only the features available will be displayed on
the DIC.
Press the reset button to scroll through the available
settings for each mode.
If you do not make a selection within ten seconds,
the display will go back to the previous information
displayed.
The default settings for the features were set when your
vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed
from their default state since that time.
Personalization Menu Modes
OIL LIFE RESET
To change feature settings, use the following procedure:
When this feature is displayed, you can reset the engine
oil life system. To reset the system, see Engine Oil Life
information.
Entering Personalization Menu
1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is stopped.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press and hold the information and reset buttons at
the same time for one second, then release to enter
the personalization menu.
If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph (3 km/h),
only the UNITS menu will be accessible.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
information.
UNITS
This feature allows you to select the units of
measurement in which the DIC will display the vehicle
information. When UNITS appears on the display, press
and hold the reset button for at least one second to
scroll through the available settings:
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
LOCK HORN
ENGLISH (default in United States): All information
will be displayed in English units.
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp
every time the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled.
When LOCK HORN appears on the display, press and
hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll
through the available settings:
METRIC (default in Canada): All information will be
displayed in metric units.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the first press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter. The horn will
still chirp on the second press.
REMOTE START
If your vehicle has remote start, this feature allows
remote start to be turned off or on. Remote start allows
you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle
using your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
When REMOTE START appears on the display, press
and hold the reset button for at least one second to
scroll through the available settings:
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the lock
button on the RKE transmitter.
page 2-4 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When LIGHT FLASH appears on the display, press and
hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll
through the available settings:
UNLOCK HORN
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp on
the first press of the unlock button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter, can be enabled or disabled.
When UNLOCK HORN appears on the display, press and
hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll
through the available settings:
OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will not
flash when the lock or unlock button on the RKE
transmitter is pressed.
ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting
will flash when the lock or unlock button on the RKE
transmitter is pressed.
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
page 2-4 for more information.
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
page 2-4 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
DELAY LOCK
This feature, which delays the actual locking of the
vehicle, can be enabled or disabled. When DELAY LOCK
appears on the display, press and hold the reset button
for at least one second to scroll through the available
settings:
LIGHT FLASH
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior
hazard/turn signal lighting to flash every time the lock or
unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled.
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door is closed. You can temporarily override
delayed locking by pressing the power lock switch or
the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter a second time.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFF: The doors will lock immediately when pressing
the power lock switch or the lock button on the
RKE transmitter.
for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic
Transmission Only)
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
This screen displays only if your vehicle has an automatic
transmission and DRIVER or ALL is selected for the
AUTO UNLK feature. This feature determines when the
automatic door unlocking will occur. When UNLK appears
on the display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
AUTO UNLK (Unlock)
This feature, which allows the vehicle to automatically
unlock certain doors, can be enabled or disabled. When
AUTO UNLK appears on the display, press and hold
the reset button for at least one second to scroll through
the available settings:
KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the key is
turned off.
ALL (default): All of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER: The driver’s door will automatically unlock.
SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
page 2-10 for more information.
NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
You will need to manually unlock the doors.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
If you have a manual transmission vehicle, the door(s)
will automatically unlock when the key is turned off.
If you have an automatic transmission vehicle, you
can select when the automatic unlocking will occur.
See “UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic Transmission Only)”
following.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS
LANGUAGE
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior perimeter
lighting to turn on each time the unlock button on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, can
be enabled or disabled. When EXT LIGHTS appears on
the display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC will display. When LANGUAGE appears on
the display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn on
when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
FRENCH: All messages will appear in French.
SPANISH: All messages will appear in Spanish.
GERMAN: All messages will appear in German.
ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting will turn
on when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter
is pressed.
To select a setting and exit out of the personalization
menu mode, press the information button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
page 2-4 for more information.
Exiting Personalization Menu
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
The personalization menu will be exited when any of the
following conditions occur:
• A ten second time period has elapsed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The end of the personalization menu list is reached.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
{ CAUTION:
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment
is added to your vehicle, the chimes may not work.
Make sure that replacement or additional equipment
is compatible with your vehicle before installing it.
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
With RAP, the audio system can be played even after
the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
• Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
page 4-2.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With Date Display
Setting the Clock
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port, and
Radio with Single CD (MP3) Player
Without Date Display
AM/FM Base Radio with a Single
CD Player
To set the time and date:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or
To set the time:
ON/RUN. Press O to turn the radio on.
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or
2. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY
ON/RUN. Press O to turn the radio on.
(hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays.
2. Press H until the hour begins flashing on the
3. Press the softkey located below any one of the tabs
that you want to change.
display. Press H a second time and the minute
begins flashing on the display.
4. To increase the time or date do one of the following:
• Press the softkey located below the selected tab.
3. While either the hour or the minute numbers are
flashing, turn f to increase or decrease the time.
• Press ¨SEEK, or \ FWD.
• Turn f clockwise.
4. Press H again until the clock display stops flashing
to set the currently displayed time; otherwise, the
flashing stops after five seconds and the current
time displayed is automatically set.
5. To decrease the time or date do one of the following:
• Press ©SEEK or s REV.
• Turn f counterclockwise.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour, press the H button until 12H or 24H is
displayed. Once 12H or 24H is displayed, turn
the f knob to the desired option to select the setting.
Press the H button again to apply the setting, or let the
screen time out.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The date does not automatically display. To see the
Radio(s)
date press H while the radio is on. The date with display
times out after a few seconds and goes back to the
normal radio and time display.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year:
1. Press H and then the softkey located below the
forward arrow label. Once the time 12H and 24H,
and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year)
and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year) displays.
2. Press the softkey located below the desired option.
3. Press H again to apply the selected default, or
let the screen time out.
Radio with CD (Base)
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The radio may have RDS. The RDS feature is available
for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS
information. This system relies upon receiving specific
information from these stations and only works when the
information is available. While the radio is tuned to an
FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters display.
In rare cases, a radio station could broadcast incorrect
information that causes the radio features to work
improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown, Radio
with CD (MP3) similar
The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio
system.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing the Radio
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to choose between FM1, FM2, AM,
or XM™ (if equipped) on the Radio with CD (Base).
Press to choose between FM, AM, XM (if equipped)
on the Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port or the Radio
with CD (MP3).
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on and
off. Turn to increase or decrease the volume.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios
with the Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) feature
automatically adjust the radio volume to compensate for
road and wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows
down, so that the volume level is consistent.
f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
© SEEK: Press to seek or scan stations with a strong
To activate SCV:
signal in the selected band.
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
• To seek stations, press and release ©SEEK to go
to the previous station and stay there.
3. Press the softkey under the AUTO VOLUM tab on
the radio display.
• To scan stations, press and hold ©SEEK for a
few seconds until the radio beeps once. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes
4. Press the softkey under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.
to the next station. Press ©SEEK again to stop
scanning.
• To scan preset stations in the selected band, press
and hold ©SEEK for four seconds until a double
beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next stored
preset. Press ©SEEK again to stop scanning preset
stations.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA, or RDS features,
¨ SEEK: Press to seek or scan stations with a strong
press 4 to display additional text information related to the
current FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3, WMA song.
Song title information will be displayed on the top line of
the display while the artist information will be displayed
on the bottom line, it the information is available during
XM, CD, MP3, or WMA playback. When information is
not available, “No Info” displays.
signal in the selected band.
• To seek stations, press and release ¨SEEK to go
to the next station and stay there.
• To scan stations, press and hold ¨SEEK for a
few seconds until the radio beeps once. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes
to the next station. Press ¨SEEK again to stop
Storing Radio Stations
scanning.
Depending on which radio the vehicle has, radio
stations are stored as either favorites or presets.
• To scan preset stations in the selected band, press
and hold ¨SEEK for four seconds until a double
beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next stored
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Radio that have a FAV button store radio stations as
favorites.
preset. Press ¨SEEK again to stop scanning preset
stations.
Drivers are encouraged to set up radio station favorites
while the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to favorite stations
using the softkeys, favorites button, and steering wheel
4 (Information): For vehicles with the Radio with
CD (Base), press to switch the display between the
radio station frequency and the time. While the ignition is
off, press 4 to display the time.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be
stored as favorites using the six softkeys located below
the radio station frequency tabs and by using the radio
favorites page button (FAV button). Press FAV to go
through up to six pages of favorites, each having six
favorite stations available per page. Each page of
favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, or XM
stations. The current balance/fade and tone settings are
also stored with the favorite stations.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
pressing the softkey located below the displayed
page numbers.
4. Press FAV, or let the menu time out, to return to the
original main radio screen showing the radio station
frequency tabs and to begin programming favorites.
Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service, CD, MP3, and
WMA features): If additional information is available
for the current song being played, Auto Text will
automatically page/scroll the information every
three seconds above the FAV presets on the radio
display. By default, Auto Text is enabled.
To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune to the desired radio station and set the
balance/fade and tone settings to the desired levels.
2. Press FAV to display the page where to store the
station.
To change the Auto Text setting:
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
3. Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a beep
sounds.
2. Press the softkey under AUTO TXT tab on the radio
display.
4. Repeat the steps for each radio station to be stored
as a favorite.
3. Press the softkey under the ON or OFF tab on the
radio display.
To setup the number of favorites pages:
If 4 is pressed and the song title or artist information is
longer than what can be displayed, the extra information
will page every three seconds when Auto Text is
activated.
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey located below the FAV 1-6 tab.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust the tone settings on the Radio with CD (MP3)
and USB Port or the Radio with CD (MP3):
Storing a Radio Station as a Preset
Radios that have numbered pushbuttons store radio
stations as presets.
1. Press f until the tone control tabs display.
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can
be programmed on the six numbered buttons.
2. Press the softkey below the desired tab to be
adjusted.
3. To increase the level of the bass, midrange, or treble:
To store preset stations:
1. Tune in the desired station.
• Press ¨SEEK, or \ FWD.
2. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons for
three seconds until a beep sounds.
• Turn f clockwise.
4. To decrease the level of the bass, midrange, or
treble:
3. Repeat the Steps 1 and 2 for each numbered
button.
• Press ©SEEK, or s REV.
• Turn f counterclockwise.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
The radio may be capable of adjusting bass, midrange,
or treble to the middle position by pressing the softkey
below the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for more than
two seconds. The radio beeps once and the level
adjusts to the middle position.
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): The
radio may display some or all tones such as BASS, MID,
and TREB.
To adjust the tone settings on the Radio with CD (Base):
The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone and
speaker controls to the middle position by pressing f for
more than two seconds until the radio beeps once.
Press f until the tone control labels display, then
turn f to change the setting.
If a station’s frequency is weak, or has static, decrease
the treble.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select preset
equalization settings.
To adjust balance or fade using ` :
1. Press ` until the speaker control labels display.
To return to the manual mode, press EQ until Manual
displays or start to manually adjust the bass, midrange,
2. Continue pressing ` until the desired speaker
control label displays.
or treble by pressing f .
3. Turn f to adjust the setting. The setting can also be
adjusted by pressing either SEEK arrow, \ FWD,
or s REV.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Depending on which radio the vehicle has, the
Balance/Fade can be adjusted using f or ` .
The radio may be capable of adjusting balance or fade to
the middle position by pressing the softkey below the BAL
or FADE tab for more than two seconds. The radio beeps
once and the level adjusts to the middle position.
To adjust balance or fade using f :
1. Press f until the speaker control tabs display.
2. Press the softkey under the desired tab, or continue
The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone and
speaker controls to the middle position by pressing f for
more than two seconds until the radio beeps once.
pressing f to highlight the desired tab.
3. Turn f to adjust the highlighted setting.
The highlighted setting can also be adjusted
by pressing either SEEK arrow.
On some radios, \ FWD and s REV can also
be used to adjust the highlighted level.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Undesired XM categories can be removed through the
setup menu. To remove an undesired category:
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
(XM Satellite Radio Service Only)
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey below the XM CAT tab.
CAT (Category): The radio may have the CAT button
feature.
3. Turn f to display the category to be removed.
To select and find a desired category:
4. Press the softkey below the Remove tab until the
category name along with the word Removed
displays.
1. Press BAND until the XM frequency displays.
2. Press CAT to display the category tabs on the radio
display. Continue pressing the CAT button until the
desired category name displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove additional categories.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
softkey under the Add tab when a removed category
displays or by pressing the softkey below the Restore
All tab.
3. Press either of the two softkeys below the desired
category tab to immediately tune to the first XM
station associated with that category.
4. To go to the previous or to the next XM station within
the selected category, do one of the following:
Categories cannot be removed or added while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Turn f .
Radio Messages
• Press the softkeys below the right or left arrows
on the radio display.
Calibration Error: Displays if the radio is no longer
calibrated properly for the vehicle. The vehicle must be
returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
• Press ©SEEK or ¨SEEK.
5. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV
button or BAND button to display the favorites again.
Loc or Locked: Displays when the THEFTLOCK®
system has activated. Take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM Satellite Radio Service
Ejecting a CD
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you
subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM Radio
Online for when you are not in the vehicle. A service
fee is required to receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Z EJECT: Press to eject the CD. If the CD is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically
pulls back into the player.
Playing a CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
playing.
Radio Messages for XM Only
information.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the current track, if
more than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or
press multiple times to continue moving backward
through the tracks on the CD.
Loading a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD begins playing.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and
hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through the tracks on the CD.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback
quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume and the elapsed time of the track displays.
Release to resume playing the track.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume and the elapsed time of the track
displays. Release to resume playing the track.
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio may have the ability to play an MP3 CD-R or
information.
RDM (Random): Tracks can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order.
CD Messages
CHECK DISC: If an error message displays and/or
the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
To use random:
1. Press the softkey below RDM tab until Random
Current Disc displays.
• The CD player is very hot. When the temperature
returns to normal, the CD should play.
2. Press the softkey again to turn off random play.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is playing.
The CD remains inside the radio for future listening.
• The road is very rough. When the road becomes
smoother, the CD should play.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing the track number displays when a CD is
in the player. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, No Aux Input Device Found
may display.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• A problem may have occurred while burning the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of CDs
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
Store CD(s) in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The
CD player scans the bottom of the disc. If the bottom
of a CD is damaged it may not play properly or at all.
Do not touch the bottom of a CD while handling it.
Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge
of the hole and the outer edge.
The radio system may have an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate. This is
not an audio output; do not plug the headphone set into
the front auxiliary input jack. An external audio device
such as an iPod®, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD
changer, etc. can be connected to the auxiliary input
jack for use as another audio source.
If the surface of a CD is dirty, take a soft, lint free cloth or
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure the
wiping process starts from the center to the edge.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over
the vehicle speakers.
Care of the CD Player
Do not add labels to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. Use a marking pen to write on the top of the
CD if a description is needed.
Do not use CD lens cleaners, they could damage the
CD player.
O (Power/Volume): Turn to adjust the volume.
Additional volume adjustments may have to be made
from the portable device if the volume is too quiet or
not loud.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the CD
player, use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids,
and debris.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a portable audio
device is connected to the auxiliary input. The portable
audio device continues playing until it is stopped or
turned off.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” earlier in this
section.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while a
portable audio device is connected to the auxiliary input.
Press again and the system begins playing audio
from the connected portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, No Aux Input Device
may display.
• First, Second, or Third generation iPod nano
• iPod touch
• iPod classic
Make sure the iPod has the latest firmware from Apple®
for proper operation. iPod firmware can be updated using
the latest iTunes® application. See apple.com/itunes.
Using the USB Port
For help with identifying your iPod, go to
apple.com/support.
Radio’s with a USB port can control a USB storage
device or an iPod® using the radio buttons and knobs.
how to connect and control a USB storage device or
an iPod.
Using an MP3
Format
USB Support
Radios that have the capability of playing MP3’s can
play .mp3 or .wma files that were recorded onto a CD-R
or CD-RW disc. Radios that have a USB port can
play .mp3 and .wma files that are stored on a USB
storage device as well as AAC files that are stored
on an iPod®.
The USB connector is located on the front of the radio
and uses the USB 2.0 standard.
USB Supported Devices
• USB Flash Drives
• Portable USB Hard Drives
• Fifth generation or later iPod
Compressed Audio
The radio can play discs that contain both uncompressed
CD audio and MP3 files. If both formats are on the disc,
the radio reads all MP3 files first, then the uncompressed
CD audio files.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD-R or CD-RW Supported File and Folder
Structure
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a folder. Files are stored
in the root directory when the disc or storage device
does not contain folders. Files accessed from the root
directory of a CD display as F1 ROOT.
The radio supports:
• Up to 50 folders.
• Up to 8 folders in depth.
• Up to 50 playlists.
Empty Folder
Folders that do not contain files are skipped, and the
player advances to the next folder that contains files.
• Up to 255 files.
• Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension.
• Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda file extension.
Order of Play
Tracks are played in the following order:
USB Supported File and Folder Structure
The radio supports:
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
• Up to 700 folders.
• Up to 8 folders in depth.
• Up to 65,535 files.
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder has
played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
• Folder and file names up to 64 bytes.
• Files with an .mp3 or .wma file extension.
• AAC files stored on an iPod.
• FAT16
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless the folder
mode has been chosen as the default display. The new
track name displays.
• FAT32
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
File System and Naming
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 files on the CD currently
playing.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving backward through
tracks.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are
shortened. The display does not show parts of words on
the last page of text and the extension of the filename is
not displayed.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and
hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through tracks.
Preprogrammed Playlists
CDs that have preprogrammed playlists that were
created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software can be accessed, however, there
is no playlist editing capability using the radio. These
playlists are treated as special folders containing
compressed audio song files.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume and the
elapsed time of the file displays. Release s REV to
resume playing.
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls file extension and are
stored on a USB device may be supported by the
radio with a USB port.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume and the elapsed time of the file displays.
Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed
time of the file displays.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To listen to files by another artist, press the softkey
located below either arrow tab. The disc goes to the next
or previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue pressing
either softkey below the arrow tab until the desired artist
displays.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the softkey below
S c to go to the first track in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the softkey below
c T to go to the first track in the next folder.
To change from playback by artist to playback by album:
1. Press the softkey located below the Sort By tab.
RDM (Random): MP3 files can be listened to on a CD
in random, rather than sequential order. To use random,
press the softkey under the RDM tab until Random
Current Disc displays to play songs from the current CD
in random order. Press the same softkey again to turn off
random play.
2. Press one of the softkeys below the album tab from
the sort screen.
3. Press the softkey below the back tab to return to
the main music navigator screen.
The album name displays on the second line between
the arrows and songs from the current album begins
to play. Once all songs from that album have played, the
player moves to the next album in alphabetical order
on the CD and begins playing MP3 files from that album.
h (Music Navigator): Press the softkey below h
to have the files played in order by artist or album.
The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and
album ID3 tag information. It can take several minutes
to scan the disc depending on the number of files on the
disc. The radio may begin playing while it is scanning
in the background.
To exit music navigator mode, press the softkey
below the Back tab to return to normal MP3 playback.
When the scan is finished, the disc begins playing files
in order by artist. The current artist playing is shown
on the second line of the display. Once all songs by that
artist are played, the player moves to the next artist in
alphabetical order and begins playing files by that artist.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a USB Storage Device
or iPod®
Using the Radio to Control a USB
Storage Device or iPod
The USB Port can be used to control an iPod or a USB
storage device.
The radio can control a USB storage device or an iPod
using the radio buttons and knobs and display song
information on the radio’s display.
To connect a USB storage device, connect the device
to the USB port located on the front of the radio.
f (Tune): Turn to select files.
To connect an iPod, connect one end of the USB cable
that came with the iPod to the iPod’s dock connector and
connect the other end to the USB port located on the front
of the radio. If the vehicle is on and the USB connection
works, “OK to disconnect” and a GM logo may appear
on the iPod and iPod appears on the radio’s display.
The iPod music appears on the radio’s display and
begins playing.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or
press multiple times to continue moving backward
through tracks.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and
hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through tracks.
The iPod charges while it is connected to the vehicle if
the vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
position. When the vehicle is turned off, the iPod
automatically powers off and will not charge or draw
power from the vehicle’s battery.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release
s REV to resume playing. The elapsed time of the file
displays.
If you have an older iPod model that is not supported, it
can still be used by connecting it to the Auxiliary Input
Jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 inch) stereo cable.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more
information.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed
time of the file displays.
4 (Information): Press to display additional information
about the selected track.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Softkeys to Control a USB
Storage Device or iPod
c (Folder View): Press the softkey below c to view
the contents of the current folder on the USB drive.
To browse and select files:
The five softkeys below the radio display are used to
control the functions listed below.
1. Press the softkey below c .
2. Turn f to scroll through the list of folders.
To use the softkeys:
1. Press the first or fifth softkey below the radio display
to display the functions listed below, or press the
softkey below the function if it is currently displayed.
3. Press f to select the desired folder. If there is
more then one folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until
the desired folder is reached.
2. Press the softkey below the tab with the function on
it to use that function.
4. Turn f to scroll through the files in the selected
folder.
j (Pause): Press the softkey below j to pause the
track. The tab appears raised when pause is being used.
Press the softkey below j again to resume playback.
5. Press f to select the desired file to be played.
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used
to navigate in the following order:
Back: Press the softkey below the back tab to go back
to the main display screen on an iPod, or the root
directory on a USB storage device.
• First softkey, first item in the list.
• Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
• Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
• Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
• Fifth softkey, end of the list.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be
used to navigate in the following order:
h (Music Navigator): Press the softkey below h
to view and select a file on an iPod, using the iPod’s
menu system. Files are sorted by:
• First softkey, first item in the list.
• Playlists
• Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
• Artists
• Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
• Albums
• Genres
• Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
• Songs
• Composers
To select files:
1. Press the softkey below h .
• Fifth softkey, end of the list.
Repeat Functionality
To use Repeat:
2. Turn f to scroll through the list of menus.
3. Press f to select the desired menu.
Press the softkey below " or ' to select between
Repeat All and Repeat Track.
" (Repeat All): Press the softkey below " to repeat
all tracks. The tab appears lowered when Repeat All is
being used. This is the default mode when a USB storage
device or iPod is first connected.
4. Turn f to scroll through the folders or files in the
selected menu.
5. Press f to select the desired file to be played.
' (Repeat Track): Press the softkey below ' to
repeat one track. The tab appears raised when Repeat
Track is being used.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shuffle Functionality
XM Radio Messages
To use Shuffle:
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, or
any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Press the softkey below > , 2 , < or = to select
between Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle Songs,
Shuffle Album, or Shuffle Folder.
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
> (Shuffle Off): Press the softkey below 2 to turn
shuffle off. This is the default mode when a USB storage
device or iPod is first connected.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area, the
signal should return.
2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle Songs): Press the
softkey below = or < to shuffle all songs on the USB
storage device or iPod.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
< (Shuffle Album): Press the softkey below > to
shuffle all songs in the current album on an iPod.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in service.
Tune in to another channel.
= (Shuffle Folder): Press the softkey below > to
shuffle all songs in the current folder on a USB storage
device.
Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be
received with your XM Subscription package.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
No Title Info: No song title information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No CAT Info: No category information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working properly.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear within
a short period of time, the receiver could have a fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
Bluetooth®
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make and
receive phone calls. The system can be used while the
key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position. The
range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 30 ft. (9.1 m).
Not all phones support all functions, and not all phones
are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth
system. See gm.com/bluetooth for more information on
compatible phones.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle could
have previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having the
vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later
calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume level is
used if the volume is turned down too low.
Voice Recognition
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret
voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.
Bluetooth Controls
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum. The
system may not recognize voice commands if there is
too much background noise.
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to operate
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio Steering
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
b g (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls,
to confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural
voice.
c x (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a
call, or to cancel an operation.
Audio System
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers
and overrides the audio system. Use the audio system
volume knob, during a call, to change the volume level.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pairing a Phone
Pairing
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not
connected, calls will be made using OnStar® Hands-Free
Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner’s guide for
more information.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on
this process.
Pairing Information:
• Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system.
• The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is
moving.
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the list
on the cellular phone and follow the instructions on
the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number that
was provided in Step 3.
• The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
with the first available paired cell phone in the
order the phone was paired.
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use
a name that best describes the phone. This name
will be used to indicate which phone is connected.
The system then confirms the name provided.
• Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.
• Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
Linking to a Different Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the
system will say “Is connected” after the connected
phone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.
• If another phone is found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
Deleting a Paired Phone
• If another phone is not found, the original phone
remains connected.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Storing Name Tags
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
delete followed by a tone.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>?
Yes or No” followed by a tone.
• Store
• Digit Store
• Directory
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store,
number please” followed by a tone.
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.
Using the Digit Store Command
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
• If the system recognizes the number it responds
with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone number.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats the
number followed by “Please say yes or no”. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. If the number is not
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the
number to be re-entered.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with “Please
say the first digit to store” followed by a tone.
4. After the system stores the phone number, it
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to be
stored is complete.
Using the Directory Command
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the system
will repeat them.
4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
Deleting Name Tags
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
• Delete
• Delete all name tags
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Delete Command
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command
The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar,
if present.
To use the delete command:
To use the delete all name tags command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete, <name
tag>? Please say yes or no”.
• If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete
the name tag. The system responds with “OK,
deleting <name tag>, returning to the main menu.”
• Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.
• Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the
main menu.
• If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The system
responds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please say
the name tag.”
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the following commands:
• Dial
• Digit Dial
• Call
• Re-dial
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
Using the Dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be
dialed is complete. After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds with
“OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
<phone name>. Number please” followed by a tone.
3. Say the entire number without pausing.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
• If the system recognizes the number, it responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
• If the system does not recognize the number,
it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
If the number is not correct, say “No”. The system
will ask for the number to be re-entered.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
Using the Call Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
Using the Digit Dial Command
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digit
dial using <phone name>, please say the first digit
to dial” followed by a tone.
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
Receiving a Call
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number.
When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
• Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
• Press c x to ignore a call.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed
by a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.
The system responds with “OK, calling,
Call Waiting
<name tag>” and dials the number. If the name
tag is not correct, say “No”. The system will
ask for the name tag to be re-entered.
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
• Press b g to answer an incoming call when
another call is active. The original call is placed
on hold.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
Using the Re-dial Command
• Press b g again to return to the original call.
• To ignore the incoming call, continue with the
original call with no action.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds
with “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials the
last number called from the connected Bluetooth
phone.
• Press c x to disconnect the current call and
switch to the call on hold.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To Mute a call
Three-Way Calling
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
Three-Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth
phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier
to work.
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with “Call
muted”.
1. While on a call press b g . The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
To Cancel Mute
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.
4. Once the call is connected, press b g to link all
Transferring a Call
the callers together.
Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
Ending a Call
Press c x to end a call.
Muting a Call
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be
muted so that the person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes after
the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position.
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is
used when calling a menu driven phone system.
Account numbers can be programmed into the
phonebook for retrieval during menu driven calls.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
press b g for more than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.
Sending a Number During a Call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
Voice Pass-Thru
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
3. Say the number to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
• If the system is not sure it recognized the
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with
“OK, accessing <phone name>”.
• The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone’s
operating instructions.
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
Other Information
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective owners.
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
3. Say the name tag to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the name
tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the
name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the phonebook and
phone pairing information. For information on how to
delete this information, see the above sections on
Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e + / e − (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
Theft-Deterrent Feature
the radio volume.
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.
w / x (Next / Previous): Press to change radio
stations, select tracks on a CD, or to select tracks and
navigate folders on an iPod® or USB device.
To change radio stations:
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
• Press and release w or x to go to the next or
previous radio station stored as a preset.
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending
on the vehicle’s options.
Some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
• Press and hold w or x to go to the next or
previous radio station in the selected band with a
strong signal.
To select tracks on a CD:
Press and release w or x to go to the next or previous
track.
To select tracks on an iPod or USB device:
1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song
until the contents of the current folder display on
the radio display.
2. Press and release w or x to scroll up or down the
list, then press and hold w to play the highlighted
track.
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To navigate folders on an iPod or USB device:
Radio Reception
1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song
until the contents of the current folder display on
the radio display.
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power
outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item
from the accessory power outlet.
2. Press and hold x to go back to the previous
folder list.
3. Press and release w or x to scroll up or down
AM
the list.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
• To select a folder, press and hold w when the
folder is highlighted.
• To go back further in the folder list, press
and hold x .
c (End): Press to reject an incoming call, or end a
current call.
FM Stereo
b g (Mute / Voice Recognition): Press to silence the
vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on.
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Although the radio has a built-in electronic circuit that
automatically works to reduce interference, some static
can occur, especially around tall buildings or hills,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
For vehicles with OnStar® or Bluetooth systems press
and hold b g for longer than two seconds to interact
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Occasionally check to make sure the antenna is
tightened to its base. If tightening is required, tighten by
hand until fully seated plus one quarter turn.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to
fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
loss of the XM signal for a period of time.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of
the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for
clear radio reception.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when making
or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s battery,
or simply having the phone on. This interference causes
an increased level of static while listening to the radio.
If static is received while listening to the radio, unplug
the cellular phone and turn it off.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the XM
system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Chime Level Adjustment
The radio may be used to adjust the vehicle’s chime
level. If the radio can be used to change the volume
level of the chime, press and hold the sixth numbered
pushbutton or the sixth FAV pushbutton with the ignition
on and the radio power off. The volume level changes
between Normal and Loud. The selected volume
level appears on the radio display.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged as long as it is securely attached
to the base. If the mast becomes slightly bent, straighten
it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.
Removing the radio and not replacing it with a factory
radio or chime module will disable vehicle chimes.
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Defensive Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and
the Vehicle
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
{ CAUTION:
• Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
• Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
• Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
• When road and weather conditions are appropriate,
use cruise control, if equipped.
• Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
• Focus on the task of driving.
• Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
• Combine several trips into a single trip.
• Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Spec
number molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size.
• Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Drunk Driving
{ CAUTION:
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your
reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment
can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.
You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision
if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home
in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road can
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the vehicle.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annual
motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The brakes might not have time to cool between hard
stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a lot
of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic and
allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking and
longer brake life.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakes
are pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down.
If the engine stops, there will still be some power brake
assist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Once
the power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a second.
But that is only an average. It might be less with one
driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination,
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and
frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second, a
vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet
(20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,
so keeping enough space between the vehicle and others
is important.
If the vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and
the 2.0L turbocharged engine, it also has a hydraulic
brake boost feature which supplements the power brake
system to maintain consistent brake performance under
conditions of low brake booster vacuum. Low brake
booster vacuum conditions can include initial start up
after the vehicle has been parked for several hours, very
frequent brake stops, or high altitude driving. When
hydraulic brake boost is active, minor brake pulsation or
movement might be felt but this is normal. If brake pedal
feel changes or the brake pedal feels hard to push, the
system might not be receiving the intended brake boost
and the SVC BRAKE SYSTEM DIC message may be
displayed.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, or
icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight of
the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.
This is a mistake.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Under certain weather or operating conditions, occasional
brake squeak, squeal, or other noise might be heard with
the vehicle’s performance braking system. The brake
system on SS models is designed for superior fade
resistance and consistent operation using high
When the engine is started, or when the vehicle begins
to drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor
or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going
on, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal
moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
performance brake pads. Brake noise and brake dust
are normal and do not affect system performance.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
The vehicle might have the Antilock Brake System
(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that helps
prevent a braking skid.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
If the vehicle has ABS,
this warning light on the
instrument panel comes on
briefly when the vehicle is
started.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to get
a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping
distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that
vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough
room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or feel
the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal. This helps
retain steering control. Without ABS, it is different.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. A slight brake pedal
pulsation might be felt or some noise noticed, but this is
normal.
In many emergencies, steering can help more than
even the very best braking.
Braking in Emergencies
Brake Assist
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
If this vehicle has ESC with ABS, it also has a Brake
Assist feature designed to assist the driver in stopping
or decreasing vehicle speed in emergency driving
conditions. This feature uses the stability system
hydraulic brake control module to supplement the
power brake system under conditions where the driver
has quickly and forcefully applied the brake pedal in
an attempt to quickly stop or slow down the vehicle.
The stability system hydraulic brake control module
increases brake pressure at each corner of the vehicle
until the ABS activates. Minor brake pedal pulsations
or pedal movement during this time is normal and the
driver should continue to apply the brake pedal as the
driving situation dictates The Brake Assist feature will
automatically disengage when the brake pedal is
released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased.
If the vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC) with
Antilock Brake System (ABS), it allows the driver to steer
and brake at the same time. However, if the vehicle does
not have ESC with ABS, the first reaction — to hit the
brake pedal hard and hold it down — might be the wrong
thing to do. The wheels can stop rolling. Once they do,
the vehicle cannot respond to the driver’s steering.
Momentum will carry it in whatever direction it was
headed when the wheels stopped rolling. That could be
off the road, into the very thing the driver was trying to
avoid, or into traffic.
If the vehicle does not have ABS, use a “squeeze”
braking technique. This gives maximum braking while
maintaining steering control. Do this by pushing on
the brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light flashes on the
instrument panel cluster
when the ESC system is
on and activated.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The vehicle has an Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system which combines antilock brake, and traction and
stability control systems that help the driver maintain
directional control of the vehicle in most driving
conditions.
When the vehicle is started and begins to move, the
system performs several diagnostic checks to ensure
there are no problems. The system may be heard or felt
while it is working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with the vehicle. The system should
initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).
ESC activates when the computer senses a discrepancy
between the intended path and the direction the
vehicle is actually traveling. ESC selectively applies
braking pressure at any one of the vehicle’s brakes to
help steer the vehicle in the intended direction.
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the ESC/TCS
light comes on, and the ESC OFF and/or SERVICE ESC
message displays.
When the system activates, an ESC ACTIVE message
displays on the Driver Information Center. See DIC
flashes on the instrument panel cluster when the
ESC system is on and activated. Noise or vibration may
be felt in the brake pedal. This is normal. Continue to
steer the vehicle in the desired direction.
For more information, see Driver Information Center
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the light is on solid and the message(s),
SERVICE ESC, ESC OFF, or both display, the system
will not assist the driver in maintaining directional
control of the vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The traction control system can be turned off or back
on by pressing the ESC/TCS button. To disable
both traction control and ESC, press and hold the button
from five to ten seconds.
When the ESC system is turned off, the TRACTION OFF
and ESC OFF messages appear, and the ESC/TCS light
comes on to warn the driver that both traction control and
ESC are disabled.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is
automatically enabled whenever the vehicle is started.
To assist the driver with vehicle directional control,
especially in slippery road conditions, always leave
the system on. ESC can be turned off if needed.
It is recommended that the system remain on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle to attempt to
free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road conditions where high
wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the system begins
to assist the driver maintain directional control of the
vehicle, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. The cruise control
can be re-engaged when road conditions allow.
ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines that
a problem exists with the system. The ESC OFF and
SERVICE ESC messages and the ESC/TCS light comes
on to warn the driver that ESC is disabled and requires
service. If the problem does not clear after restarting the
vehicle, see your dealer/retailer for service. See DIC
information.
The ESC/TCS button is
located on the instrument
panel.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Competitive Driving Mode
(SS Models Only)
Launch Control (SS Models Only)
Launch Control is a form of traction control, to control
tire spin while launching the vehicle during closed track
events and competitive driving. The feature is activated
when the vehicle is at rest while in Competitive Mode.
At rest, if the accelerator pedal is pressed to the floor
with the clutch engaged, the RPM is limited to a
predetermined level. A smooth, quick release of the
clutch while keeping the accelerator pedal on the floor will
provide controlled wheel spin for consistent acceleration.
If the vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission,
complete shifts as described in Manual Transmission
The driver can select this optional handling mode by
pressing the ESC/TCS button on the console two times
quickly. COMPETITIVE MODE will be displayed in the
Competitive Driving Mode allows the driver to have full
control of the front wheels while the ESC system helps
maintain directional control of the vehicle by selective
brake application. The ESC/TCS light will be on and the
traction control system will not be operating. Adjust your
driving accordingly. This electronic stability control mode
is recommended only for use during closed track events
and competitive driving venues.
LAUNCH CONTROL displays in the DIC after the
COMPETITIVE MODE message, when the vehicle is
stopped. The system will exit to COMPETITIVE MODE
after the vehicle is launched. See “Competitive Driving
Mode” earlier in this section. The normal Traction
Control System (TCS) will not be operating while in the
Competitive Driving mode and the TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on. Adjust your driving
page 3-50 for more information.
When the ESC button is pressed again, or the vehicle is
restarted, the ESC and TCS will be turned back on.
Notice: When traction control is turned off, or
Competitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible to
lose traction. If you attempt to shift with the front
wheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is possible
to cause damage to the transmission. Do not attempt
to shift when the front wheels do not have traction.
Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle is not
covered. See your warranty book for additional
information.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle is in cruise control while TCS begins
to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. The cruise control can be re-engaged when
road conditions allow. See Turn Signal/Multifunction
Traction Control System (TCS)
The vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road
conditions. The system operates only if it senses that the
front wheels are spinning too much or are beginning to
lose traction. When this happens, the system works the
front brakes and reduces engine power by closing the
throttle and managing engine spark to limit wheel spin.
When this light is on and
either the SERVICE
TRACTION or TRACTION
OFF message is displayed,
the system will not limit
wheel spin.
This light flashes while the
traction control system is
limiting wheel spin.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC Warnings and
The Traction Control System comes on automatically
whenever the vehicle is started. It is recommended to
leave the system on for normal driving conditions, but it
may be necessary to turn the system off if the vehicle is
stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, and you want to “rock”
your vehicle to attempt to free it. It may also be necessary
to turn off the system when driving in off-road conditions
where high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is
The system may be heard or felt while it is working.
This is normal and does not mean there is a problem
with the vehicle.
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-35
for more information.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn the system off or
on, press and release the
ESC/TCS button located
on the instrument panel.
differential could be damaged. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Reduce engine
power and do not spin the wheel(s) excessively while
these lights and this message are displayed.
Notice: When traction control is turned off, or
Competitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible to
lose traction. If you attempt to shift with the drive
wheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is possible
to cause damage to the transmission. Do not attempt
to shift when the drive wheels do not have traction.
Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle is not
covered. See the warranty book for additional
information.
The DIC displays the appropriate message as described
previously when the button is pressed.
Traction Control Operation
Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine
power to the wheels (engine speed management)
and by applying brakes to each individual wheel
(brake-traction control) as necessary.
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens, a reduction
in acceleration may be noticed or a noise or vibration
may be heard. This is normal.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when the vehicle is started, and it will activate and flash
the ESC/TCS light and display the LOW TRACTION
message if it senses that either of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving.
For more information on the LOW TRACTION message,
If the vehicle is in cruise control while the system
activates, the ESC/TCS light flashes and the cruise
control automatically disengages. The cruise control can
be re-engaged when road conditions allow. See Cruise
Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle are allowed
to spin excessively while the ESC/TCS, ABS and
Brake warning lights and the SERVICE ESC and/or
SERVICE TRACTION messages are displayed, the
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
The vehicle may have an Enhanced Traction System
(ETS) that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning
or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system reduces engine power and may also upshift the
transmission to limit wheel spin.
The ETS indicator/warning light may come on for the
following reasons:
If the vehicle has ETS, there is not an ESC/TCS button
on the instrument panel. To turn the system off, shift
to L (Low) or R (Reverse). There is more information
about how to turn the system off later in this section.
• The indicator/warning light flashes while the traction
control system is limiting wheel spin.
• If the system is turned off by moving the shift lever
to L (Low), the indicator/warning light comes on
and stays on. To turn the system back on, move
the shift lever back to a position other than L (Low).
The indicator/warning light should go off.
The ETS indicator/warning light flashes and
LOW TRACTION appears on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) when the traction control system is actively
limiting wheel spin. The system may be heard or felt while
it is working, but this is normal. Slippery road conditions
may exist if this message is displayed, so adjust your
driving accordingly.
• The indicator/warning light will come on when the
parking brake is set with the engine running, and it
will stay on if the parking brake does not release fully.
If the transmission shift lever is in any position other
than L (Low) and the indicator/warning light stays on
after the parking brake is fully released, there is a
problem with the system.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the ETS begins
to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. The cruise control can be re-engaged when
• If the traction control system is affected by an engine
related problem, the system will turn off and the
indicator/warning light will come on.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the ETS indicator/warning light comes on and stays on
for an extended period of time when the transmission
shift lever is in any position other than L (Low), the
vehicle may need service.
If the ETS is limiting wheel spin when the transmission is
shifted to L (Low) or R (Reverse) to turn the system off,
the indicator/warning light and TRACTION OFF will come
on in L (Low). But the system will not turn off right away.
It will wait until there is no longer a current need to limit
page 3-50 for more information on the messages
associated with this light.
When this light is on solid, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
Check the DIC messaging to determine whether it is
because of the driver turning off the system, or that the
system may not be working properly and the vehicle
requires service. When this light is turned on, either the
SERVICE TRACTION or TRACTION OFF message
will be displayed.
The system can be turned back on at any time by
shifting to D (Automatic Overdive) or I (Intermediate).
The ETS indicator/warning light should go off.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
more information on the messages associated with
this light.
Limited-Slip Differential
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, ETS should always be left on. But the
system can be turned off if needed.
Vehicles with a limited-slip differential can give more
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like
a standard axle most of the time, but when traction
is low, this feature allows the drive wheel with the most
traction to move the vehicle. The limited slip design
has minimal impact to the steering feel, but boosts the
traction performance under all conditions.
To turn the system off, shift to L (Low) or R (Reverse).
When the system is turned off, the ETS indicator/warning
light will come on and stay on and the TRACTION OFF
message will be displayed when the gear shift is in
L (Low). The indicator/warning light and message will
not come on when the gear shift is in R (Reverse).
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The electric power steering system does not require
regular maintenance. If you suspect steering system
problems and/or the POWER STEERING message
comes on, contact your dealer/retailer for service
Steering
Electric Power Steering
If the engine stalls while driving, the power steering
assist system will continue to operate until you are able
to stop the vehicle. If power steering assist is lost
because the electric power steering system is not
functioning, the vehicle can be steered but it will take
more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several
times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in the
stopped position for an extended amount of time,
you may notice a reduced amount of power steering
assist. The normal amount of power steering assist
should return shortly after a few normal steering
movements.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. These problems
can be avoided by braking — if you can stop in time.
But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is
no room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes — but, unless the vehicle
has antilock brakes, not enough to lock the wheels.
speed as possible from a collision. Then steer around
the problem, to the left or right depending on the space
available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and
a quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turned
a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the
object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches, 8 to 13 cm, (about
one-eighth turn) until the right front tire contacts the
pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC), the
ESC might activate. See Electronic Stability Control
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
more limited.
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s three
control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are not
rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed
or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting
to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the
tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
If the vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS) or
the Enhanced Traction System (ETS), remember: It helps
to avoid only the acceleration skid. See Traction Control
TCS or ETS, or if the system is off, then an acceleration
skid is best handled by easing your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
If the vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS),
remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If the
vehicle does not have ABS, then in a braking skid,
where the wheels are no longer rolling, release enough
pressure on the brakes to get the wheels rolling again.
This restores steering control. Push the brake pedal down
steadily when you have to stop suddenly. As long as the
wheels are rolling, you will have steering control.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for
a second skid if it occurs.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
Racing or Other Competitive Driving
See your warranty book before using your vehicle for
racing or other competitive driving. After reviewing your
warranty book, please see the GM Performance Parts
website or catalog and contact the race sanctioning
bodies, for example Sports Car Club of America (SCCA)
or Grand American, for parts and equipment required for
racing or other competitive driving.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up
so much road ahead.
Notice: If you use your vehicle for competitive
driving, the engine may use more oil than it would
with normal use. Low oil levels can damage the
engine. Be sure to check the oil level often during
competitive driving and keep the level at or near the
upper mark that shows the proper operating range
on the engine oil dipstick. For information on how to
• Watch for animals.
• When tired, pull off the road.
• Do not wear sunglasses.
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But, as
we get older, these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver might need at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the water. This
can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going
fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has
little or no contact with the road.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect
your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive slower
in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving
through large puddles and deep-standing or flowing
water.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
{ CAUTION:
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of the
vehicle.
• Allow extra following distance.
• Pass with caution.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until
the brakes work normally.
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
on page 5-53.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.
• Turn off cruise control.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a safe
place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
Other driving tips include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
clean — inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hill and Mountain Roads
{ CAUTION:
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition
off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the engine running
and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.
• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
{ CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads, but
apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain begins
to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid driving on wet
ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with salt
or sand.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay
with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,
To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
page 4-12, it improves the ability to accelerate on slippery
roads, but slow down and adjust your driving to the road
conditions. When driving through deep snow, turn off the
traction system to help maintain vehicle motion at lower
speeds.
• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{ CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.If the vehicle is
stuck in the snow:
• Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
• Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
• Open a window about two inches (5 cm) on
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to keep warm
also helps.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting.
See Climate Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle
speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps.
Do this as little as possible to save fuel.
CAUTION: (Continued)
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
{ CAUTION:
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,
they can explode, and you or others could be
injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin
the wheels as little as possible and avoid going
above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help
to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading the Vehicle
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area
around the front wheels. Turn off any traction system.
Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a forward
gear, or with a manual transmission, between 1 (First) or
2 (Second) and R (Reverse), spinning the wheels as little
as possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait until the
wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Release the
accelerator pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the
accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear.
Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse
directions causes a rocking motion that could free the
vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after a few
tries, it might need to be towed out. If the vehicle does
page 4-31.
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicle show
how much weight it may properly carry, the Tire
and Loading Information label and the Vehicle
Certification label.
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The tire and loading information label lists the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds. The vehicle capacity weight includes
the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all
nonfactory-installed options.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also lists the
tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation, see
on page 5-61.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles.
Label Example
See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find
the label attached below the door lock post (striker).
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity for your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
page 4-41 for important information on towing a
trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Example 2
Item
Description
Total
Item
Description
Total
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
1,000 lbs
1,000 lbs
A
A
(453 kg)
(453 kg)
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Available Cargo
Weight =
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
maximum vehicle capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.
Example 3
Item
Description
Total
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 3 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
B
C
0 lbs (0 kg)
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh
your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this.
Be sure to spread out your load equally on both
sides of the centerline.
Certification Label
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found
on the rear edge of the driver’s door, or on the
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar).
The label shows the size of your original tires
and the inflation pressures needed to obtain
the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — they
will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will
keep going.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your dealer/
retailer or a professional towing service if the disabled
vehicle must be towed. See Roadside Assistance
{ CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome,
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with
two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device
known as a dolly.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
Dinghy Towing
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• What is the distance that will be travelled? Some
vehicles have restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
• Is the proper towing equipment going to be used?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Use the following procedure to dinghy tow the vehicle
from the front with all four wheels on the ground:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY to
unlock the steering wheel.
3. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
4. Release the parking brake.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To prevent the battery from draining while the vehicle is
being towed, remove the following fuse from the floor
console fuse block: 8 (Ignition Switch, PASS-Key® III+).
more information.
Dolly Towing
Remember to reinstall the fuse once the destination has
been reached.
Notice: If 65 mph (105 km/h) is exceeded while
towing the vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing the vehicle.
Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Never have the vehicle towed
from the rear.
Use the following procedure to dolly tow the vehicle
from the front with two wheels on the ground:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
6. Release the parking brake.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration,
braking, cooling, durability and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
Towing a Trailer
(Automatic Transmission)
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these
are important for your safety and that of your passengers.
So please read this section carefully before pulling a
trailer.
{ CAUTION:
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even at
all. The driver and passengers could be seriously
injured. The vehicle may also be damaged; the
resulting repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only if all the steps in
this section have been followed. Ask your dealer/
retailer for advice and information about towing a
trailer with the vehicle.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, wheel assemblies and tires are forced to
work harder against the drag of the added weight. The
engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds
and under greater loads, generating extra heat. Also, the
trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing
the pulling requirements.
SS Package
If the vehicle has the SS package, it is neither designed
nor intended to tow a trailer.
The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with an
automatic transmission and the proper trailer towing
equipment. If the vehicle is not equipped as stated
above, do not tow a trailer. To identify the trailering
capacity of the vehicle, read the information in “Weight
of the Trailer” that appears later in this section.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer
Pulling A Trailer
Here are some important points:
• The weight of the trailer tongue
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
the rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you will be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• The total weight on the vehicle’s tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
transmission or other parts could be damaged.
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,
altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how
much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important.
It can depend on any special equipment on the vehicle,
and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this section for
more information.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h), to
save wear on the vehicle’s parts.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
• Do not tow when the outside air temperature is
above 100°F (38°C).
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information or
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices.
information.
• Do not tow more than 1,000 miles (1 600 km)
per year.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight of the
vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and the
people who will be riding in the vehicle. If there are a lot of
options, equipment, passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it
will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which
will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow.
If towing a trailer, the tongue load must be added to the
GVW because the vehicle will be carrying that weight,
information about the vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
If using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A)
should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for
the vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension that will
position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. This will help
reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle.
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry
tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle
to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect
of additional weight may reduce the trailering capacity
more than the total of the additional weight.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Consider the following example:
If the vehicle has many options and there is a front seat
passenger and two rear seat passengers with some
luggage and gear in the vehicle as well. 300 lbs (136 kg)
could be added to the front axle weight and 400 lbs
(181 kg) to the rear axle weight. The vehicle now weighs:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you
might think 700 additional pounds (318 kg) should be
subtracted from the trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. The maximum trailer would only be
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think the
tongue weight should be limited to less than 1,000 lbs
(454 kg) to avoid exceeding GVWR. But the effect on the
rear axle must still be considered. Because the rear axle
now weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), 900 lbs (408 kg) can be
put on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR. The
effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times the actual
weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves only
600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight that can be handled.
Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of total
loaded trailer weight, expect that the largest trailer the
vehicle can properly handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
Expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of trailer
weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the weight is
applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on the rear
axle is greater than just the weight itself, as much as
1.5 times as much. The weight at the rear axle could be
850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since the
rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding
1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg).
This is very close to, but within the limit for RGAWR as
well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs
(3 856 kg).
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is important that the vehicle does not exceed any of
its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer
Rating or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure it
is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh
the vehicle and trailer.
Safety Chains
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of
the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the
road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Always
leave just enough slack so the rig can turn. Never
allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
Tire-Loading Information label. See Loading the Vehicle
on page 4-25. Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for
the vehicle, or the GAWR, including the weight of the
trailer tongue.
Trailer Brakes
A loaded trailer that weighs more than 1,500 lbs
(680 kg) needs to have its own brake system that is
adequate for the weight of the trailer. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so
they are installed, adjusted and maintained properly.
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why the right hitch is needed.
• The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Get to know the rig before setting out for the open road.
Get acquainted with the feel of handling and braking with
the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind
that the vehicle you are driving is now longer and not as
responsive as the vehicle is by itself.
• Will there be any holes in the body of the vehicle
after installing a trailer hitch? If there are, then be
sure to seal the holes later when the hitch is
removed. If the holes are not sealed, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from exhaust can get into the vehicle.
can also enter the vehicle.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving
and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand
to be sure the brakes are working. This checks
the electrical connection at the same time.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
Making Turns
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations that require heavy
braking and sudden turns.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the
trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the vehicle
is turning, changing lanes or stopping.
Passing
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
the lane.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument panel
flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned
out. For this reason you may think other drivers are
seeing the signal when they are not. It is important to
check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving on Grades
Parking on Hills
Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous grades
exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher than
normal engine and transmission temperatures may
result and damage the vehicle. Frequent stops are
very important to allow the engine and transmission
to cool.
{ CAUTION:
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
attached can be dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a
flat surface.
When towing under severe conditions such as hot
ambient temperatures or steep grades, the vehicle may
experience more transmission shifting. A COOLING
MODE ON message may also appear in the DIC.
This alerts the driver that the shifting mode is in progress
and is aiding engine cooling. See DIC Warnings and
for more information.
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is
not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
Pay attention to the engine coolant gage. If the indicator
is in the red area, turn off the air conditioning to reduce
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
brake pedal until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and brake
system. It is a good idea to inspect these before and
during the trip.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:
• start the engine,
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during
page 5-32.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Towing a Trailer
(Manual Transmission)
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a
trailer. See this manual’s Maintenance Schedule or Index
for more information. Things that are especially important
in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid,
Do not tow a trailer if the vehicle is equipped with a
manual transmission.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,
ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,
traction control, and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause malfunction or damage
not covered by the vehicle warranty.
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, are not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/retailer
and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
{ CAUTION:
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. English and metric fasteners can be
easily confused. If the wrong fasteners are
used, parts can later break or fall off. You could
be hurt.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials. Special handling
may be necessary. For additional information,
see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order
the proper service manual, see Service Publications
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the
mileage and the date of any service work performed.
page 5-7. If the vehicle has the 2.0L L4 engine
(VIN Code X), use only unleaded gasoline.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Gasoline Octane
If the vehicle has the 2.2L L4 engine (VIN Code B), use
regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating
of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87, you
might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the
engine needs service.
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment
to the outside of the vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part
of the proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
If the vehicle has the 2.4L L4 engine (VIN Code V) or
the 2.0L L4 engine (VIN Code X), use premium unleaded
gasoline with a posted octane rating of 91 or higher.
You can also use regular unleaded gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, but the vehicle’s acceleration could
be slightly reduced, and you might notice a slight audible
knocking noise, commonly referred to as spark knock.
If the octane is less than 87, you might notice a heavy
knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.
Otherwise, you could damage the engine. If you are using
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy
knocking, the engine needs service.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
If the vehicle has the 2.2L L4 engine (VIN Code B)
or the 2.4L L4 engine (VIN Code V), you can use either
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasoline Specifications
Additives
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in
Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of
for additional information.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
California Fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance might be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is
the only gasoline additive recommended by General
Motors.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
If your vehicle has the 2.2L L4 engine (VIN Code B)
or the 2.4L L4 engine (VIN Code V), you can use either
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to
engines, use only the unleaded gasoline described
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the vehicle
warranty.
Only vehicles that have the 2.2L L4 engine (VIN Code B)
or the 2.4L L4 engine (VIN Code V) can use 85% ethanol
fuel (E85). We encourage the use of E85 in vehicles
that are designed to use it. The ethanol in E85 is a
“renewable” fuel, meaning it is made from renewable
sources such as corn and other crops.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance
of the emission control system could be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol
fuel (E85) pump available. The U. S. Department
of Energy has an alternative fuels website
(www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/infrastructure/locator.html)
that can help you find E85 fuel. Those stations that
do have E85 should have a label indicating ethanol
content. Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content
is greater than 85%.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM
Notice: Some additives are not compatible with
E85 fuel and can harm the vehicle’s fuel system.
Do not add anything to E85. Damage caused
by additives would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Specification D 5798. By definition, this means
that fuel labeled E85 will have an ethanol content
between 70% and 85%. Filling the fuel tank with fuel
mixtures that do not meet ASTM specifications can
affect driveability and could cause the malfunction
indicator lamp to come on.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85 fuel
must be formulated properly for your climate according to
ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble starting
on E85, it could be because the E85 fuel is not properly
formulated for your climate. If this happens, switching to
gasoline or adding gasoline to the fuel tank can improve
starting. For good starting and heater efficiency below
32°F (0°C), the fuel mix in the fuel tank should contain
no more than 70% ethanol. It is best not to alternate
repeatedly between gasoline and E85. If you do switch
fuels, it is recommended that you add as much fuel as
possible — do not add less than three gallons (11 L)
when refueling. You should drive the vehicle immediately
after refueling for at least seven miles (11 km) to allow the
vehicle to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you will
need to refill the fuel tank more often when using E85
than when you are using gasoline. See Filling the Tank
on page 5-9.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
{ CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the pump island. Turn off the engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge in
and release and it will open.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
{ CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged
fuel door on the passenger side of the vehicle. If the
vehicle has E85 fuel capability, the fuel cap will be
yellow and state that E85 or gasoline can be used.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill
the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise
until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap
has been left off or improperly installed. This would
allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
{ CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
The CHECK GAS CAP message displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not properly
page 3-50 for more information.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-37.
To close the fuel door securely, push the door to the
closed position.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the
vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or on
any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling
is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
{ CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Then go to the front of
the vehicle and push
the secondary hood
release lever to the left.
It is located under the
front center of the
grille.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following.
1. Pull the interior hood
release lever with
this symbol on it. It is
located to the left of the
instrument panel on
the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
3. After you have partially lifted the hood, gas struts
will automatically take over to lift and hold the
hood in the fully open position.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Lower the hood until the lifting force
of the struts is reduced, then release the hood
to latch fully. Check to make sure the hood is
closed and repeat the process if necessary.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-34.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
C. Coolant Recovery Tank. See “Checking Coolant”
page 5-39.
E. Electric Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View). See
K. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Out of View).
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you open the hood on the 2.0L L4 engine, this is what you will see:
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-34.
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
D. Coolant Recovery Tank. See “Checking Coolant”
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the
oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
G. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
on page 5-26.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
on page 5-39.
page 5-39.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark, add at least
one quart/liter of the recommended oil. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
page 5-114.
2.2L L4 Engine and
2.4L L4 Engine
2.0L L4 Engine
the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
upper mark that shows the proper operating range,
the engine could be damaged.
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
when through.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• GM6094M
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
For Vehicles With the 2.2L or
2.4L L4 Engine
• SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Look for three things:
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using oils that do not have the GM4718M
Standard designation can cause engine damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
For Vehicles with the 2.0L L4 Engine Only
Look for three things:
• SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
This vehicle’s engine was filled at the factory with a
synthetic oil meeting all requirements for this vehicle.
• GM4718M
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
might not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol
at all temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM
Standard GM4718M should not be used for an
oil change.
This vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M, such as Mobil 1® or
equivalent. Oils meeting this standard may be
identified as synthetic. However, not all synthetic oils
will meet this GM standard. Use only an oil that meets
GM Standard GM4718M.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Temperature Operation
Engine Oil Life System
For Vehicles With the 2.2L or
2.4L L4 Engine
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has the Engine Oil Life System, a computer
system that indicates when to change the engine oil and
filter. This is based on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving
conditions, the mileage at which an oil change is
indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system
to work properly, the system must be reset every time
the oil is changed.
If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature
falls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide
easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low
temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required
specification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine
Oil to Use” for more information.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on. See DIC
as soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the
oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at this
time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has
trained service people who will perform this work using
genuine parts and reset the system. It is also important to
check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
Engine Oil Additives/Engine Oil Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are
all that is needed for good performance and engine
protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For vehicles with the 2.2L (VIN code V) or 2.4L (VIN
code B) engines, you can also reset the system
as follows:
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE OIL SOON
message being turned on, reset the system.
1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowly
three times within five seconds.
3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF, then start the engine.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back
on when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the reset procedure.
After changing the engine oil, the system must be reset:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off.
What to Do with Used Oil
2. Press the information and reset buttons on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) at the same
time to enter the personalization menu. See DIC
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
3. Press the information button to scroll through the
available personalization menu modes until the
DIC display shows OIL-LIFE RESET.
4. Press and hold the reset button until the DIC display
shows ACKNOWLEDGED. This will tell you the
system has been reset.
5. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter (2.2L and 2.4L Engines)
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change. The 2.0L engine inspect at
each oil change. Replace filter if appears dusty or dirty.
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust
and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter is
required. Never use compressed air to clean the filter.
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter (2.0L Engine Only)
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow sensor, PCV hose,
and both ducts.
2. Pull the entire system from the top of the engine.
3. Turn the system over and place it on a soft,
non-abrasive surface.
4. Remove the screws that hold the housing and
cover together and lift off the housing.
5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
6. Reverse the steps to reinstall the system. Be sure
to reinstall the housing tightly.
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust
and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter is
required. Never use compressed air to clean the filter.
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
into the engine, which will damage it. Always have
the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.
1. Remove the screws that hold the housing and
cover together and lift off the cover.
2. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
3. Reverse the steps to reinstall the system. Be sure
to reinstall the housing tightly.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to a dealer/retailer and
have it repaired as soon as possible.
{ CAUTION:
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in the
page 6-4. Be sure to use the transmission fluid listed
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may
not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Transmission Fluid
Cooling System
It is not necessary to check the manual transmission fluid
level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to a dealer/retailer
for service. Have it repaired as soon as possible. You
may also have the fluid level checked by your dealer/
retailer when the oil is changed. See Recommended
to use.
The Cooling System allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. This system does not have its own
reservoir. It receives fluid from the brake master cylinder
reservoir.
A. Pressure Cap
B. Coolant Recovery Tank
C. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in
the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
{ CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you
can be burned.
The following explains the cooling system and how to
check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
What to Use
• Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
{ CAUTION:
outside temperature.
• Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C), engine
temperature.
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get
too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
• Protects against rust and corrosion.
• Will not damage aluminum parts.
• Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,
the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could be
damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine
coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system.
page 6-14 for more information.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
The coolant recovery tank
cap has this symbol on it.
The tank is located in
the engine compartment
toward the front of the
engine on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
the COLD FILL (A) line or a little higher. The COLD
FILL line is near the bottom of the tank and sticks out
from the rear of the tank.
more information on location.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down. If
coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above
the COLD FILL mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant
recovery tank, but be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
or above the COLD FILL line. If it is not, you may
have a leak in the cooling system.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the Cooling
System
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
{ CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
{ CAUTION:
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If no coolant is visible in the coolant recovery tank, add
coolant at the pressure cap as follows:
1. Remove the pressure
cap when the cooling
system, including
the pressure cap and
upper radiator hose, is
no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left to be vented.
5. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the
COLD FILL (A) line.
6. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the pressure cap off.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap and remove it.
3. Add the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture to
the coolant fill port, up to the base of the port.
for more information about the proper coolant
mixture.
7. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
4. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine
and the compartment.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler port may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the fill port until the level reaches the base
of the fill port.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine
overheating.
You will find a coolant temperature warning light and a
coolant temperature gage on your vehicle’s instrument
panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
9. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure, if coolant begins to flow out of the
fill port, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
10. When the engine has cooled, check the coolant in
the coolant recovery tank. The level in the coolant
recovery tank should be at the COLD FILL line
when the engine is cold.
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away.
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
Pressure Cap
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run
the engine and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
more information on location.
Notice: If the engine catches fire because of being
driven with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly
damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when the vehicle:
{ CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no
sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
• Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
• Stops after high-speed driving.
• Idles for long periods in traffic.
• Tows a trailer.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of steam:
1. Turn the air off.
If you keep driving when your engine is overheated,
the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could
be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats,
and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let
the engine idle.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive
the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the
warning does not come back on, continue to drive
normally.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
page 5-14 for reservoir
location.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the brake linings are
worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake linings
are installed. Add or remove fluid, as necessary, only
when work is done on the brake/clutch hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder and, on manual transmission
vehicles, the clutch hydraulic system use the same
page 5-14 for the location of the reservoir. The reservoir
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid.
{ CAUTION:
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the
engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and the vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake and/or clutch hydraulic system.
• The brake fluid level goes down because of normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,
the fluid level goes back up.
• A fluid leak in the brake and/or clutch hydraulic
system can also cause a low fluid level. Have the
brake and/or clutch hydraulic system fixed, since a
leak means that sooner or later the brakes and/or
clutch will not work well.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
What to Add
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
or clutch hydraulic system parts. For example,
just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in the brake or clutch hydraulic
system can damage brake or clutch hydraulic
system parts so badly that they will have
to be replaced. Do not let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt
from entering the reservoir.
{ CAUTION:
• If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake or clutch
hydraulic system, the brakes or clutch might not
work well. This could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Brake Wear
This vehicle has front disc brakes and could have rear
drum brakes or rear disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. The sound can come
and go or be heard all the time the vehicle is moving,
except when applying the brake pedal firmly.
If the vehicle has rear drum brakes, they do not have
wear indicators, but if a rear brake rubbing noise is heard,
have the rear brake linings inspected immediately. Rear
brake drums should be removed and inspected each time
the tires are removed for rotation or changing. When the
front brake pads are replaced, have the rear brakes
inspected, too.
{ CAUTION:
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is
heard, have the vehicle serviced.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Brake Adjustment
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.
Every time the brakes are applied, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change in
many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts
are installed.
Vehicle Storage
{ CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that
can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not
on working around a battery without getting hurt.
Battery
Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This helps keep the battery from running down.
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or
use a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain the
charge of the battery over an extended period of time.
The battery is located in the cargo area. Access to the
battery is not necessary to jump start the vehicle.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered
by the warranty.
Jump Starting
If the vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start the
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
{ CAUTION:
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start the vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in N (Neutral) before setting the parking brake.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
You will not see the battery of your vehicle under
the hood. It is located in the rear cargo area.
You will not need to access your battery for jump
starting. The vehicle has a remote positive (+) and a
remote negative (−) jump starting terminal.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed.
This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
Locate the remote positive
terminal which is located
under a red tethered cap on
the engine compartment
fuse block. Remove the cap
to access the terminal.
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
Do not remove fuse block cover to jump start the
vehicle.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locate the remote
negative (−) ground
terminal, marked GND (−),
which is located at the front
of the engine compartment
on the driver side of the
vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you don’t,
explosive gas could be present.
for more information on the location of the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminals on the
vehicle.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
{ CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
{ CAUTION:
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal location on the vehicle
with the dead battery. Your vehicle has a remote
negative (−) ground terminal marked GND (−).
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal location on the vehicle with the dead battery.
Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) terminal cover to its original
position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal (GND)
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall or other
flat surface.
Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
• Not have any snow, ice, or mud on it.
• Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while
headlamp aiming is being performed.
However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment may be
necessary.
• Normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one
person or 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the driver seat.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
may also mean the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.
• Have all tires properly inflated.
• Have the spare tire is in its original location in the
vehicle.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to
be re-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aim the
headlamps as described.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
The vehicle should:
• Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from
a light colored wall.
• Have all four tires on a level surface which is level
all the way to the wall.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust the vertical aim:
for more information.
4. At the wall measure from the ground upward (A) to
the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall the
width of the vehicle at the height of the mark in
Step 4.
2. Find the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam
headlamp.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
3. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim
dot on the low-beam headlamp. Record the
distance.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a piece
of cardboard or equivalent in front of the headlamp
not being adjusted. Do not place directly on the
headlamp. This allows only the beam of light from
the headlamp being adjusted to be seen on the flat
surface.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The top edge of the cut-off should be positioned at
the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape
line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the
incorrect headlamp aim.
Driver Side Shown
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a
6 mm hex socket.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the
angle of the beam.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and
Parking Lamps
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
{ CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions on the bulb package.
A. Headlamp
B. Turn Signal/Parking Lamp
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace the headlamp, turn signal, or parking
lamp bulb:
3. Reach in behind the wheel well liner and locate the
bulb to be changed.
1. Turn the wheel to access the wheel well.
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it
straight out of the lamp assembly.
5. Pull the old bulb straight out of the bulb socket.
6. Push the new bulb straight into the bulb socket until
it clicks.
7. Push the bulb socket straight into the lamp
assembly and turn it clockwise to lock it into place.
8. Reinstall the wheel well liner using fasteners.
2. Remove the fasteners located on the wheel liner.
To access the headlamp and the turn signal/parking
lamp bulbs.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
To replace the center high-mounted stoplamp bulb:
4. Pull the old bulb straight out of the bulb socket.
5. Push the new bulb straight into the bulb socket until
it clicks.
6. Push the bulb socket straight into the lamp
assembly and turn it clockwise to lock it into place.
7. Reinstall the center trim.
2. Remove the center trim located near the top of the
liftgate.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it
straight out of the lamps assembly.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace one of these bulbs:
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
A. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp
B. Back-up Lamp
2. Remove the cover in the rear cargo area of the
vehicle to access the bulbs.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it
straight out of the lamp assembly.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
5. Install a new bulb. When installing the bulb socket
into the assembly, line up the tabs with the slots in
the bulb assembly.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Push the bulb socket straight into the lamp
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
assembly and turn it clockwise to lock it into place.
7. Reinstall the cover.
4. Push the new bulb into the bulb socket and turn it
clockwise to lock it into place.
License Plate Lamp
5. Push and turn the license plate back through the
fascia opening.
To replace one of these bulbs:
6. Reinstall the two screws holding the license plate
lamps to the fascia.
1. Remove the two screws holding each of the license
plate lamps to the fascia.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
Back-up Lamp and CHMSL
921
Front Turn Signal and Parking
Lamp (Amber)
5702KA
Front Turn Signal and Parking
Lamp (Clear)
B2N
H13
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal
3057KX
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward
through the fascia opening.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
for more information on wiper blade inspection.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For the proper type and
page 6-16. Here’s how to remove the wiper blade:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
2. While holding the wiper arm, lift the clip up from the
blade connecting point, and pull the blade assembly
down toward the windshield to remove it from the
wiper arm.
3. Install the new wiper blade on the wiper arm and
press down on the clip to snap it into place.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement
1. Remove the protective cap from the wiper arm.
If the protective cap is not removed before lifting
the wiper arm, the wiper arm could be damaged.
{ CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an air-out
and a serious accident. See Loading the
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting
accident could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your vehicle’s
tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
• Overinflated tires are more likely to
be cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if your
vehicle’s tires have been damaged,
replace them.
2. Pull the wiper arm away from the backglass and
into the service position.
3. Rotate the wiper blade, and pull down on it to
remove it from the wiper arm.
4. Install the new wiper blade, then set the wiper
arm back into its original position and replace
the protective cap.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details. For additional information refer
to the tire manufacturer.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low-Profile Performance Tire
If your vehicle has P225/45R18 size tires, they are
classified as low-profile performance tires. These
tires are designed for very responsive driving on
wet or dry pavement. You may also notice more
road noise with low-profile performance tires and
that they tend to wear faster.
Notice: If the vehicle has low-profile tires,
they are more susceptible to damage from road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage
can occur when coming into contact with
road hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged
objects, or when sliding into a curb. The
vehicle warranty does not cover this type of
damage. Keep tires set to the correct inflation
pressure and, when possible avoid contact
with curbs, potholes, and other road hazards.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’s
width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of
the tire, although only one side may have the date
of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number
of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction, and
temperature resistance. For more information see
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of
the tire, although only one side may have the date
of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
page 5-61.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact
spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If your
vehicle has a compact spare tire, see Compact
page 5-75.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect
ratio, construction type, and service description.
The letter T as the first character in the tire size
means the tire is for temporary use only.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as
it is wide.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to
carry a load.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set
by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
page 5-61.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be
made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
page 4-25.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using government
testing procedures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid
at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading the
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see Loading
vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort.
Never load your vehicle with more weight than it
was designed to carry.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
When to Check
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should
be at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The
TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle’s
tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a
pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended pressure on
the Tire and Loading Information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure
is low, add air until you reach the recommended
amount.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science
Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Vehicles with TPMS operate on a radio frequency and
comply with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
additional information.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by the
driver. For additional information and details about the
DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and
on page 3-50.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when a
low tire pressure condition exists. If your vehicle has this
feature, TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and
wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel
assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in
the vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label shows the size of
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the correct
inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires when they are
example of the Tire and Loading Information label and
its location on your vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS turns on the low tire
pressure warning light
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and the
DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle
until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not covered
by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire sealants.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the
problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can
cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come
on are:
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re-install the
road tire containing the TPMS sensor.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal a
low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service if
the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on
and stays on.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started but
not completed or not completed successfully after
rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message and
TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS
sensor matching process is performed successfully.
See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this
section.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press and hold the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter’s LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, at the
same time, for about five seconds to start the TPMS
learn mode. The horn sounds twice indicating the
TPMS receiver is ready and in learn mode.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code. Any
time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors or
rotate the vehicle’s tires, the identification codes need to
be matched to the new tire/wheel location. The sensors
are matched, to the tire/wheel locations, in the following
order: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire,
passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire using
a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer for
service.
4. Start with the driver side front tire. The driver side
front turn signal also comes on to indicate that
corner’s sensor is ready to be learned.
5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valve
stem. Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing
or decreasing the tire’s air pressure for about
eight seconds. The horn chirp, can take up to
30 seconds to sound. It chirps one time and then
all the turn signals flash one time to confirm the
sensor identification code has been matched to
the tire/wheel position.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. When increasing the tire’s pressure, do
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
the tire’s sidewall. To decrease the tire’s air-pressure
use the pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style
air pressure gage, or a key.
6. The passenger side front turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side front tire and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
You have two minutes to match each tire and wheel
position. If it takes longer than two minutes to match any
tire and wheel position, the matching process stops and
you need to start over.
7. The passenger side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
The TPMS matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. The driver side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
9. After hearing the single horn chirp for the driver
side rear tire, two additional horn chirps sound to
indicate the tire learning process is done. Turn
the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
If no tires are learned after entering the TPMS learn
mode, or if communication with the receiver stops, or
if the time limit has expired, turn the ignition switch to
LOCK/OFF and start over beginning with Step 2.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This
will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate the tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.
Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later,
if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
When rotating the vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire
rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
page 4-25.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
tread remaining.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if your
vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast this
aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure about
the need to replace your tires as they get older, consult
the tire manufacturer for more information.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.
This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will
help keep your vehicle performing most like it
did when the tires were new. Replacing less than
a full set of tires can affect the braking and
handling performance of your vehicle. See Tire
information on proper tire rotation.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed
to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that
you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This
way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same performance and vehicle
safety, during normal use, as the original tires.
{ CAUTION:
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded
onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire size. If the
tires have an all-season tread design, the
TPC Spec number will be followed by an MS for
page 5-54 for additional information.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different
sizes, brands, or types (radial and bias-belted
tires), the vehicle may not handle properly,
and you could have a crash. Using tires of
different sizes, brands, or types may also
cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to
use the correct size, brand, and type of tires
on all wheels. It is all right to drive with
your compact spare temporarily, as it
was developed for use on your vehicle.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
{ CAUTION:
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this could
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as anti-lock brakes, rollover
airbags, traction control, and electronic stability control,
the performance of these systems can be affected.
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make
sure they are the same size, load range, speed
rating, and construction type (radial and
{ CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may
not provide an acceptable level of performance and
safety if tires not recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase the chance that you
will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for your
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.
bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system could give an inaccurate low-pressure
warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed
on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires
may give a low-pressure warning that is higher or
lower than the proper warning level you would
get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
information about the Tire and Loading Information
Label and its location on your vehicle.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law. It should be noted that
the temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires
and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors
for your vehicle.
Used Replacement Wheels
{ CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how far it
has been driven. It could fail suddenly and cause a
crash. If you have to replace a wheel, use a new
GM original equipment wheel.
{ CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
Tire Chains
{ CAUTION:
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without
the proper amount of clearance can cause damage
to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle parts.
The area damaged by the tire chains could cause
you to lose control of the vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
information.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on the
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.
To help avoid damage to the vehicle, drive slowly,
readjust or remove the device if it is contacting
the vehicle, and do not spin the vehicle’s wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the front tires.
{ CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a Flat Tire
CAUTION: (Continued)
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6.
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,
you should put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in
P (Park), or shift a manual transmission to
1 (First) or R (Reverse).
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The jack, wheel wrench, and spare tire are stowed
in the rear of the vehicle, underneath the floor of the
cargo area. To remove the spare tire and tools:
more information.
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
2. Remove the cargo cover.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Remove the spare tire by placing your hands at the
four and eight o’clock positions. Gently pull it up
and out of the trunk. See Compact Spare Tire
on page 5-98.
6. Remove the wing nut that holds the jack. Then
remove the jack, wheel wrench, and flat tire strap.
3. Turn the retainer counterclockwise to remove the
tire cover.
4. Remove the tire cover.
The tools needed are the jack (A) and wheel wrench (B).
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn the plastic wheel nut counterclockwise to loosen
the wheel wrench from the jack.
Press the button and then pull on the end of the wheel
wrench to extend the handle.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
(All Models Except SS)
3. Position the jack and raise the jack lift head to fit
over the car flange under the down arrow markings
on the rocker panel.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.
Do not remove them yet.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and
vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into
the proper location before raising the vehicle.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit underneath the wheel well.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
CAUTION: (Continued)
or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to
the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
page 5-76.
6. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is
fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after
time. The wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust
CAUTION: (Continued)
7. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
8. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque
page 5-114 for the wheel nut torque specification.
{ CAUTION:
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or
come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened with
a torque wrench to the proper torque specification
after replacing. Follow the torque specification
supplied by the aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel nuts. See Capacities
equipment wheel nut torque specifications.
10. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire (SS Model)
The SS Model has larger performance brakes than
the base model. The compact spare tire will not clear
the front brakes.
Do not use the compact spare tire in the event of a front
flat tire.
You must use the rear tire to replace the front flat tire.
To change the rear road tire:
Rear Tire Changing Procedure
1. Do a safety check before proceeding.
for more information.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts
on the rear tire. Do not remove them yet.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and
vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into
the proper location before raising the vehicle.
3. Position the jack on the rear position and raise the
jack lift head to fit over the car flange under the
down arrow markings on the rocker panel.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off
the tire.
6. Install the compact spare tire.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit underneath the wheel well.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is
fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after
time. The wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust
or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
9. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
10. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
8. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
torque specification.
{ CAUTION:
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose
or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened
with a torque wrench to the proper torque
specification after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the aftermarket
manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel
page 5-114 for original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
11. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the front flat tire:
Front Tire Changing Procedure
1. Perform a rear tire change by removing the rear tire
and installing the compact spare tire in the rear
wheel location. The rear road tire will be used
to replace the front flat tire. See Rear Tire Changing
Procedure in this section.
3. Position the jack on the front position and raise the
jack lift head to fit over the car flange under the
down arrow markings on the rocker panel.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts
on the front flat tire. Do not remove them yet.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and
vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into
the proper location before raising the vehicle.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the tire.
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is
fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after
time. The wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust
or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
6. Install the tire.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
wheel.
8. Place the tire on the wheel mounting surface.
9. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each by hand
until the wheel is held against the hub.
10. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
{ CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
{ CAUTION:
sequence, as shown.
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose
or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened
with a torque wrench to the proper torque
specification after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the aftermarket
manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel
page 5-114 for original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
torque specification.
{ CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Route the loop end of
the strap (C) through
one of the cargo
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
To store the flat tire:
tie-downs (A) located in
the rear of the vehicle.
more information.
2. Put back all tools as they were stored in the rear
storage compartment and put the compartment
cover back on. For more information, see “Storing
the Compact Spare Tire and Tools” next in this
section.
3. Install the cargo cover. For more information, see
page 2-52.
6. Route the hook (B) through the loop (C).
7. Pull the strap to tighten it around the cargo
tie-down (A).
4. Place the tire, lying flat, in the rear storage
compartment.
If there is a loop on the end of the strap used to
secure the flat tire, go to Step 5. If there is not
a loop, go to Step 8.
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Aluminum Wheel
Steel Wheel
8. Route the hook end of the strap through the wheel.
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Attach the strap to the
cargo tie-downs in the
rear of the vehicle.
10. Slide the buckle to tighten the tie-down strap.
Storing the Compact Spare Tire
and Tools
A. Retainer
B. Cover
C. Spare Tire
D. Wing Nut
E. Jack and Wheel
Wrench
F. Strap
Use the diagram as a guide for storing the compact
spare tire once you are done using it.
G. Bolt
more information.
2. Install the strap (F) on the floor of the spare tire
compartment.
3. Place the jack and wheel wrench (E) over the
bolt (G), making sure the strap is securely
stored, under the jack and wheel wrench.
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Secure the jack and wheel wrench (E) with the
wing nut (D).
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
5. With the valve stem up, place the spare tire (C) on
the compartment floor.
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop
as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire
is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced at your convenience. Of course, it is best
to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as
possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
6. Make sure the bolt (G) passes through the wheel
center.
7. Install the spare tire cover (B).
8. Secure the spare tire and tools with the retainer (A).
The compact spare tire storage area is designed only
for the compact spare tire, the standard tire cannot
be stored there.
Compact Spare Tire
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails which can damage the tire,
wheel and other parts of the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
Driving with more than one compact spare tire at
a time could result in loss of braking and handling.
This could lead to a crash and you or others could
be injured. Use only one compact spare tire at
a time.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.
Using them can damage the vehicle and can damage
the chains too. Do not use tire chains on the
compact spare.
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
on surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the
upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from
becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be
removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains
to set rapidly.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s
doors and windows.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also
transfer color to the vehicle’s interior.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s upholstery
and clean the vehicle’s glass can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
Fabric/Carpet
• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil,
always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops
per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean:
• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle’s interior.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a soft
cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used.
Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot lifters
or spot removers on leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect leather may permanently change the appearance
and feel of the leather and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing
organic solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test
a small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring
formation may result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean
soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot
lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change
the appearance and feel of the interior and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to
clean the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner.
{ CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that
it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it
on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would
not be covered by the warranty.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-103.
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Finish Care
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or
caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed
to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildup
of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper
streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn
or damaged.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking
new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever
possible.
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because they could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome
polish on chrome wheels only.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving
on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium,
calcium or sodium chloride. These chlorides are
used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust.
Always wash the vehicle’s chrome with soap and
water after exposure.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes, could damage the aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive
a vehicle that has aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels through an automatic car wash that uses
silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
5-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are
not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces
on the vehicle.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
5-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications,
and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”
the vehicle’s engine code.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is
very helpful if parts need to be ordered. The label has
the following information:
This is the legal identifier for the vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel,
on the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield
from outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on the
Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and
the certificates of title and registration.
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
5-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp Wiring
Electrical System
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in the fuse
block. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to turn
off. If this happens, have the headlamp wiring checked
right away.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
the vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by the vehicle’s warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from
working as they should.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the
overload is caused by some electrical problem, have it
fixed.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Fuses in the fuse block protect the power windows.
When the current load is too heavy, the fuse opens
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.
5-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Floor Console Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of damage caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have
a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of the vehicle that you
can get along without — like the radio or cigarette
lighter — and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
There are two fuse blocks in the vehicle: the floor
console fuse block and the engine compartment fuse
block.
There are also one or two fuses located at the back of
the vehicle near the battery.
The floor console fuse block is located on the passenger
side of the floor console behind the forward panel.
The panel has four clips, one in each corner. Pull the
panel to disconnect the four clips, and access the fuses.
Use the fuse puller to remove fuses.
5-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
6
7
8
9
Amplifier
Cluster
Ignition Switch, PASS-Key® III+
Stoplamp
Heating, Ventilation, Air
10
Conditioning, PASS-Key® III+
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Empty
Spare
Airbag
Spare
Windshield Wiper
Climate Control System, Ignition
Window Retained Accessory Power
Empty
Electric Power Steering, Steering
Wheel Control
19
20
21
22
23
24
Sunroof
Spare
Empty
Audio System
XM Radio™, OnStar™
4
5
Empty
Empty
5-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Engine Control Module,
Transmission Control Module
25
26
27
28
29
Door Locks
Interior Lights
Steering Wheel Control Illumination
Power Windows
Relays
30
31
Usage
Climate Control System
Empty
32
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
Fuses
Usage
Electric Power Steering
Rear Defogger
Empty
Body Control Module 3
Starting System
The underhood fuse block is located on the driver side
of the engine compartment. Lift the cover to access
the fuse/relay block.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
Body Control Module 2
5-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
37
40
41
42
Usage
Power Seat (Option)
Cooling Fan
Engine Control Module
Cam Phaser (Turbo Only)
Engine Control Module,
Transmission
Antilock Brake System (Option)
Injectors, Ignition Module
Backup Lamps
Heated Seat
Windshield Washer Pump
Fog Lamps (Option)
Sensing and Diagnostic
Module (SDM)
Antilock Brake System (Option)
Windshield Wiper Diode
Windshield Wiper
Rear Power Plug (Panel Van Only),
Cooling Fan (SS only)
7
8
9
Empty
Air Conditioning Clutch Diode
Liftgate, Sunroof
Empty
Rear Power Outlet (Panel Van Only)
Fuel Pump
10
11
12
13
20
21
22
23
25
27
29
30
31
32
33
36
43
44
45
46
47
49
53
Rear Wiper
Mirror
Air Conditioning
Heated Seats (Option)
Fuse Puller
56
Empty
57
58
59
60
61
62
Cigarette Lighter
Power Outlet
Daytime Running Lamps
Empty
Horn
Antilock Brake System (Option)
Instrument Panel, Ignition
Emissions
Power Windows
5-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
63
64
65
66
Usage
Driver Side High-Beam
Canister Vent
Driver Side Low-Beam
Passenger Side Low-Beam
Passenger Side High-Beam
Parking Lamps
Relays
39
48
50
51
52
54
55
Usage
Windshield Washer Pump
Rear Windshield Washer
Cooling Fan
Run, Crank
67
69
Windshield Wiper
Fog Lamps (Option)
Horn
68
70
71
72
Parking Lamps
Relays
14
15
Usage
Rear Defogger Relay
Air Conditioning Clutch
Empty
Windshield Wipers
Headlamp Low-Beam
Headlamp High-Beam
16
17
18
19
Rear Wiper
Liftgate Release
Fuel Pump
A Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Relay, and a Rear
Access Panel Door Interlock Relay (Panel Van only), are
located underhood in front of the left shock tower.
24
26
28
34
35
38
Empty
Powertrain
Daytime Running Lamps
Starting System
Empty
The Left Rear Access Panel Door Relay (Panel
Van Only), and the Right Rear Access Panel Door
Relay (Panel Van Only) are located in the rear of the
vehicle behind the right rear quarter trim panel.
A Rear Power Plug mini fuse (Panel Van Only) is
located near the battery in the rear of the vehicle.
Empty
5-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Maintenance
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
2.0L Engine
2.2L Engine
2.4L Engine with Automatic Transmission
2.4L Engine with Manual Transmission
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
9.2 qt
7.4 qt
8.5 qt
8.7 qt
5.0 qt
8.7 L
7.0 L
8.0 L
8.2 L
4.7 L
61.3 L
16.2 gal
5-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Transmission Fluid
Automatic (Bottom Pan Removal)
Manual — 2.0L L4 Engine (Drain and Refill)
Manual — 2.2L L4 or 2.4L L4 Engine (Drain and Refill)
Wheel Nut Torque
7.0 qt
2.0 qt
1.7 qt
6.6 L
1.9 L
1.6 L
100 lb ft
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual.
Engine Specifications
Engine
2.0L L4 Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
Automatic
Manual
X
0.035 in (0.90 mm)
Automatic
Manual
2.2L L4 Engine
2.4L L4 Engine
B
V
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
Automatic
Manual
5-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
5-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Maintenance Schedule
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
the vehicle in good working condition, but also helps
the environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from the vehicle. To help protect the environment, and to
keep the vehicle in good condition, be sure to maintain
the vehicle properly.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to help keep this vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive
it. You might drive very short distances only a few times
a week. Or you might drive long distances all the time in
very hot, dusty weather. You might use the vehicle in
making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work, to do
errands, or in many other ways.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warranty
and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer for
details.
Maintenance Requirements
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need
more frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep this vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless
you are technically qualified and have the necessary
equipment, have your dealer/retailer do these jobs.
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine parts.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
To purchase service information, see Service
on page 5-5.
should be checked, when to check it, and what can easily
be done to help keep the vehicle in good condition.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
page 6-16. When the vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives
the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine parts
from your dealer/retailer.
{ CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have
any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it is
recommended that the first service be Maintenance I, the
second service be Maintenance II, and then alternate
Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter. However,
in some cases, Maintenance II may be required more
often.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message displays,
service is required for the vehicle. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system may not indicate that
vehicle service is necessary for over a year. However, the
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year
and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/
retailer has trained service technicians who will perform
this work using genuine parts and reset the system.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
OIL SOON message displays within 10 months since the
vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was performed.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since
the last service. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System
on page 5-21 for information on the Engine Oil Life
System and resetting the system.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the CHANGE OIL SOON
message displays 10 months or more since the last
service or if the message has not come on at all for
one year.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
•
•
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
2.2L and 2.4L engines: Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
2.0L engine only: Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter.
•
•
•
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
page 6-10.
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (l).
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g).
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service only).
See footnote (h).
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (m).
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you
see anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed
safety belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect drum brake linings/shoes for wear or
cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including drums,
wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges and
latches, hood hinges and latches, and trunk lid hinges
and latches. More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will
make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or
squeak.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering cables for
proper hook-up, binding, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(g) Check system for interference or binding and for
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have high effort or
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise
control cables.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, if
contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or
page 5-104 for more information.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
(k) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(l) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
Owner Checks and Services
service.
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety,
dependability, and emission control performance. Your
dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and services.
If the vehicle is not used under any of these conditions,
the fluid and filter do not require changing.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service can
be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer perform
use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling system and
pressure cap.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Oil Level Check
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
page 5-61. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
Tire Wear Inspection
Engine Coolant Level Check
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
page 5-67.
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-27.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. For automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only in
P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts in any
other position, contact your dealer/retailer for service.
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
For manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever
in Neutral, push the clutch pedal down halfway, and
try to start the engine. The vehicle should start only
when the clutch pedal is pushed down all the way to
the floor. If the vehicle starts when the clutch pedal is
not pushed all the way down, contact your dealer/
retailer for service.
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN, but
do not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of P (Park) with
normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of P (Park),
contact your dealer/retailer for service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{ CAUTION:
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
• For automatic transmission vehicles, the ignition
should turn to LOCK/OFF only when the shift
lever is in P (Park). The ignition key should come
out only in LOCK/OFF.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
• For manual transmission vehicles, the ignition key
should come out only in LOCK/OFF.
on page 2-33.
Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right.
It should only lock when turned to the right. Contact
your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in N (Neutral),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by
the parking brake only.
{ CAUTION:
• To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to P (Park).
Then release the parking brake followed by
the regular brake.
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
Engine Cooling water and use only DEX-COOL®
System
page 5-27.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377967,
in Canada 89021320).
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377967,
in Canada 89021320).
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Hydraulic Brake
System
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hydraulic
Clutch System
Engine oil which meets
GM Standard GM6094M and
displays the American Petroleum
Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline
Engines starburst symbol. To
determine the proper viscosity for
your vehicle’s engine, see Engine
Engine Oil
(2.2L and 2.4L
L4 engines)
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
The engine requires a special engine
oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M.
Oils meeting this standard can be
identified with the American
Manual
Manual Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 88861800,
in Canada 88861801).
Transmission
(2.2L and 2.4L
L4 engines)
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified
for Gasoline Engines starburst
symbol. However, not all synthetic
API oils with the starburst symbol
will meet this GM standard. Look
for and use only an oil that meets
GM Standard GM4718M. For the
page 5-17.
Engine Oil
(2.0L L4
engine)
Manual
Transmission
(2.0L L4
Manual Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 88862472,
in Canada 88862473).
engine)
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
Key Lock
Cylinders
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring Anchor, meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
and
Release Pawl
Category LB or GC-LB.
Manual
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Transmission in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Shift Linkage meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door
Hinges
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
Chassis
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Conditioning
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Lubrication
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
2.0L Engine
15909459
22731072
12605566
52493319
—
2.2L and 2.4L Engines
Engine Oil Filter
A3054C
PF457G
CF125
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Spark Plugs
2.0L Engine
12617309
12625058
41-108
41-103
2.2L and 2.4L Engines
Wiper Blades
Front – 19.7 inches (50 cm)
Rear – 10.8 inches (27.4 cm)
25882578
22709463
—
—
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call General Motors
of Canada Customer Communication Centre at
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by the dealer’s sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern
has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following
steps should be taken:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to
give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following
information available to give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest following Step One first.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if
you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file
with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage,
and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to
change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware
of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration
Program. General Motors of Canada Limited has
committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The
program provides for the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute settlement process,
from the time you file your complaint to the final decision,
should be completed in about 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of
charge.
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
• Digital owner manual, warranty information,
and more
• My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Online service and maintenance records
• Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide
• Exclusive privileges and offers
• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address
and phone number for each of your preferred GM
dealers/retailers.
• My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
service estimates, check trade-in values, or
schedule a service appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
• Recall notices for your specific vehicle
• OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries
Other Helpful Links:
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com
Chevrolet Merchandise — www.chevymall.com
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/helpcenter
• FAQ
• My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
• Contact Us
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From Puerto Rico:
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV
(2438). (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Customer Assistance Offices
gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be
addressed to:
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
United States — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY
users call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872); (Text telephone (TTY):
1-888-889-2438).
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calling for Assistance
Coverage
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles
(160 000 km), whichever comes first.
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.
In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not covered.
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner
or driver if they decide the claims are made too often,
or the same type of claim is made many times.
• Description of the problem
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
Services Provided
start a dead battery.
• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your
trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental
expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 years/
100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain warranty
period. Items considered are hotel, meals, and
rental car.
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.
• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the
vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
• Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway:
Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer for warranty
service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot
be driven. Assistance is also given when the vehicle
is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.
• Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
• Legal fines.
• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and properly inflated.
It is the owner’s responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the
warranty.
• Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
• Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must
be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was
started to qualify. General Motors of Canada Limited
requires pre-authorization, original detailed receipts,
and a copy of the repair orders. Once authorization
has been received, the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help you make arrangements and explain how to
receive payment.
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted.
Propane and other fuels are not provided through
this service.
• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
• Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either with
the most direct route or the most scenic route. There
is a limit of six requests per year. Additional travel
information is also available. Allow three weeks for
delivery.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduling Service Appointments
Courtesy Transportation
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain, and
hybrid specific warranty in both the U.S. and Canada.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts. See your dealer for
information regarding the allowance amounts for
reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight warranty
repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited and must
be supported by original receipts. This requires that you
sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state/
provincial, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include minimum age
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may
also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,
excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you
with shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement
for reasonable fuel expenses may be available.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Program Information
Collision Parts
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety
are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the
vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may be
an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s originally
designed appearance and safety performance, however,
the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not
covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
any related failures are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,
have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using
the proper equipment and quality replacement parts.
Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your vehicle’s
resale value, and safety performance can be
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
compromised in subsequent collisions.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Repair Facility
If a Crash Occurs
We recommend that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Check to make sure that you are all right. If you
are uninjured, make sure that no one else in your
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle
only if its position puts you in danger or you are
instructed to move it by a police officer.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to
your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage
is not available from your current insurance carrier,
consider switching to another insurance carrier.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will
help guard against post-crash legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
page 7-7 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end of
your lease for poor quality repairs.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair.
If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take
your vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the
facility that any required replacement collision parts be
original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts or
recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts
will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the repair
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable
with their work for a long time.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation
based on that insurance company’s collision policy
repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with that
company. In such cases, you can have control of the
repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying General Motors.
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to safercar.gov;
or write to:
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C., 20590
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from safercar.gov.
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Service Bulletins
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Event Data Recorders
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a
crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking to
help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may
store data to help your dealer/retailer technician service
your vehicle. Some modules may also store data about
how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened
consumption or average speed. These modules may also
retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio
pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar®
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and use.
for more information.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other GM
system containing personal information.
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appearance Care (cont.)
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 5-106
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-51
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving (cont.)
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P
Paint, Damage .............................................. 5-106
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reconfigurable Performance Display (RPD) ........ 3-43
United States Government ............................ 7-16
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security Light ................................................. 3-41
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Black Box Marine RADAR G703 Adapters and Balun Mate II User Manual
Bolens Snow Blower 191 967 A User Manual
Bowe, Bell + Howell Scanner 1200 User Manual
Bravetti Fryer EP67 User Manual
Briggs Stratton Lawn Mower 20E200 User Manual
Broan Ventilation Hood E661 User Manual
Brookstone Fan 782019p User Manual
Carrier Heat Pump 50CR User Manual
Casio Printer LPCW 100 User Manual
Chamberlain Garage Door Opener WD822KD 1 2 HP User Manual